See the section ’The zsh/zutil Module’ in
zshmodules(1).
NAME
zshzle − zsh command line
editor
DESCRIPTION
If the
ZLE option is set (which it is by default in
interactive shells) and the shell input is attached to the
terminal, the user is able to edit command lines.
There are two
display modes. The first, multiline mode, is the default. It
only works if the TERM parameter is set to a valid
terminal type that can move the cursor up. The second,
single line mode, is used if TERM is invalid or
incapable of moving the cursor up, or if the
SINGLE_LINE_ZLE option is set. This mode is similar
to ksh, and uses no termcap sequences. If TERM
is "emacs", the ZLE option will be unset by
default.
The parameters
BAUD, COLUMNS, and LINES are also used
by the line editor. See Parameters Used By The Shell
in zshparam(1).
KEYMAPS
A keymap in ZLE
contains a set of bindings between key sequences and ZLE
commands. The empty key sequence cannot be bound.
There can be
any number of keymaps at any time, and each keymap has one
or more names. If all of a keymap’s names are deleted,
it disappears. bindkey can be used to manipulate
keymap names.
Initially,
there are four keymaps:
|
emacs |
|
EMACS emulation |
|
|
viins |
|
vi emulation − insert mode |
|
|
vicmd |
|
vi emulation − command mode |
|
|
.safe |
|
fallback keymap |
|
The
’.safe’ keymap is special. It can never
be altered, and the name can never be removed. However, it
can be linked to other names, which can be removed. In the
future other special keymaps may be added; users should
avoid using names beginning with ’.’ for
their own keymaps.
In addition to
these four names, either ’emacs’ or
’viins’ is also linked to the name
’main’. If one of the VISUAL or
EDITOR environment variables contain the string
’vi’ when the shell starts up then it
will be ’viins’, otherwise it will be
’emacs’. bindkey’s
−e and −v options provide a
convenient way to override this default choice.
When the editor
starts up, it will select the ’main’
keymap. If that keymap doesn’t exist, it will use
’.safe’ instead.
In the
’.safe’ keymap, each single key is bound
to self−insert, except for ^J (line feed) and
^M (return) which are bound to accept−line.
This is deliberately not pleasant to use; if you are using
it, it means you deleted the main keymap, and you should put
it back.
Reading
Commands
When ZLE is reading a command from the terminal, it may read
a sequence that is bound to some command and is also a
prefix of a longer bound string. In this case ZLE will wait
a certain time to see if more characters are typed, and if
not (or they don’t match any longer string) it will
execute the binding. This timeout is defined by the
KEYTIMEOUT parameter; its default is 0.4 sec. There
is no timeout if the prefix string is not itself bound to a
command.
As well as ZLE
commands, key sequences can be bound to other strings, by
using ’bindkey −s’. When such a
sequence is read, the replacement string is pushed back as
input, and the command reading process starts again using
these fake keystrokes. This input can itself invoke further
replacement strings, but in order to detect loops the
process will be stopped if there are twenty such
replacements without a real command being read.
ZLE BUILTINS
The ZLE module
contains three related builtin commands. The bindkey
command manipulates keymaps and key bindings; the
vared command invokes ZLE on the value of a shell
parameter; and the zle command manipulates editing
widgets and allows command line access to ZLE commands from
within shell functions.
bindkey [ options ] −l
bindkey [ options ] −d
bindkey [ options ] −D keymap
...
bindkey [ options ] −A
old−keymap new−keymap
bindkey [ options ] −N
new−keymap [ old−keymap ]
bindkey [ options ] −m
bindkey [ options ] −r
in−string ...
bindkey [ options ] −s
in−string out−string ...
bindkey [ options ] in−string
command ...
bindkey [ options ] [ in−string
]
bindkey’s options
can be divided into three categories: keymap selection,
operation selection, and others. The keymap selection
options are:
|
−e |
|
Selects keymap ’emacs’, and also
links it to ’main’. |
|
−v |
|
Selects keymap ’viins’, and also
links it to ’main’. |
|
−a |
|
Selects keymap ’vicmd’. |
|
−M |
|
The first non−option argument is used as a keymap
name, and does not otherwise count as an argument. |
If a keymap
selection is required and none of the options above are
used, the ’main’ keymap is used. Some
operations do not permit a keymap to be selected,
namely:
|
−l |
|
List all existing keymap names.
If the −L option is also used, list in the form
of bindkey commands to create the keymaps. |
|
−d |
|
Delete all existing keymaps and reset to the default
state. |
−D keymap
...
Delete the named
keymaps.
−A
old−keymap new−keymap
Make the
new−keymap name an alias for
old−keymap, so that both names refer to the
same keymap. The names have equal standing; if either is
deleted, the other remains. If there is already a keymap
with the new−keymap name, it is deleted.
−N
new−keymap [ old−keymap ]
Create a new keymap, named
new−keymap. If a keymap already has that name,
it is deleted. If an old−keymap name is given,
the new keymap is initialized to be a duplicate of it,
otherwise the new keymap will be empty.
To use a newly
created keymap, it should be linked to main. Hence
the sequence of commands to create and use a new keymap
’mymap’ initialized from the emacs
keymap (which remains unchanged) is:
bindkey
−N mymap emacs
bindkey −A mymap main
Note that while
’bindkey −A newmap
main’ will work when newmap is
emacs or viins, it will not work for
vicmd, as switching from vi insert to command mode
becomes impossible.
The following
operations act on the ’main’ keymap if no
keymap selection option was given:
|
−m |
|
Add the built−in set of meta−key bindings to
the selected keymap. Only keys that are unbound or bound to
self−insert are affected. |
−r
in−string ...
Unbind the specified
in−strings in the selected keymap. This is
exactly equivalent to binding the strings to
undefined−key.
When
−R is also used, interpret the
in−strings as ranges.
When
−p is also used, the in−strings
specify prefixes. Any binding that has the given
in−string as a prefix, not including the
binding for the in−string itself, if any, will
be removed. For example,
bindkey
−rpM viins ’^[’
will remove all
bindings in the vi−insert keymap beginning with an
escape character (probably cursor keys), but leave the
binding for the escape character itself (probably
vi−cmd−mode). This is incompatible with
the option −R.
−s
in−string out−string ...
Bind each
in−string to each out−string. When
in−string is typed, out−string
will be pushed back and treated as input to the line editor.
When −R is also used, interpret the
in−strings as ranges.
in−string command
...
Bind each
in−string to each command. When
−R is used, interpret the
in−strings as ranges.
[ in−string ]
List key bindings. If an
in−string is specified, the binding of that
string in the selected keymap is displayed. Otherwise, all
key bindings in the selected keymap are displayed. (As a
special case, if the −e or −v
option is used alone, the keymap is not displayed
− the implicit linking of keymaps is the only thing
that happens.)
When the option
−p is used, the in−string must be
present. The listing shows all bindings which have the given
key sequence as a prefix, not including any bindings for the
key sequence itself.
When the
−L option is used, the list is in the form of
bindkey commands to create the key bindings.
When the
−R option is used as noted above, a valid range
consists of two characters, with an optional
’−’ between them. All characters
between the two specified, inclusive, are bound as
specified.
For either
in−string or out−string, the
following escape sequences are recognised:
|
\a |
|
bell character |
|
|
\b |
|
backspace |
|
|
\e, \E |
|
escape |
|
|
\f |
|
form feed |
|
|
\n |
|
linefeed (newline) |
|
|
\r |
|
carriage return |
|
|
\t |
|
horizontal tab |
|
|
\v |
|
vertical tab |
|
|
\NNN |
|
character code in octal |
|
|
\xNN |
|
character code in hexadecimal |
|
|
\M[−]X |
|
character with meta bit set |
|
|
\C[−]X |
|
control character |
|
|
^X |
|
control character |
|
In all other
cases, ’\’ escapes the following
character. Delete is written as ’^?’.
Note that ’\M^?’ and
’^\M?’ are not the same, and that (unlike
emacs), the bindings ’\M−X’
and ’\eX’ are entirely distinct,
although they are initialized to the same bindings by
’bindkey −m’.
vared [ −Aache ] [ −p
prompt ] [ −r rprompt ]
name
The value of the parameter
name is loaded into the edit buffer, and the line
editor is invoked. When the editor exits, name is set
to the string value returned by the editor. When the
−c flag is given, the parameter is created if
it doesn’t already exist. The −a flag may
be given with −c to create an array parameter,
or the −A flag to create an associative array.
If the type of an existing parameter does not match the type
to be created, the parameter is unset and recreated.
If an array or
array slice is being edited, separator characters as defined
in $IFS will be shown quoted with a backslash, as
will backslashes themselves. Conversely, when the edited
text is split into an array, a backslash quotes an
immediately following separator character or backslash; no
other special handling of backslashes, or any handling of
quotes, is performed.
Individual
elements of existing array or associative array parameters
may be edited by using subscript syntax on name. New
elements are created automatically, even without
−c.
If the
−p flag is given, the following string will be
taken as the prompt to display at the left. If the
−r flag is given, the following string gives
the prompt to display at the right. If the −h
flag is specified, the history can be accessed from ZLE. If
the −e flag is given, typing ^D
(Control−D) on an empty line causes vared to
exit immediately with a non−zero return value.
zle −l [
−L | −a ] [ string ... ]
zle −D widget ...
zle −A old−widget new−widget
zle −N widget [ function ]
zle −C widget completion−widget
function
zle −R [ −c ] [
display−string ] [ string ... ]
zle −M string
zle −U string
zle widget [
−n num ] [ −N ] args
...
|
zle |
|
The zle builtin performs a number of different
actions concerning ZLE. Which operation it performs depends
on its options: |
−l [
−L | −a ]
List all existing
user−defined widgets. If the −L option is
used, list in the form of zle commands to create the
widgets.
When combined
with the −a option, all widget names are
listed, including the builtin ones. In this case the
−L option is ignored.
If at least one
string is given, nothing will be printed but the
return status will be zero if all strings are names
of existing widgets (or of user−defined widgets if the
−a flag is not given) and non−zero if at
least one string is not a name of an defined
widget.
−D widget
...
Delete the named
widgets.
−A
old−widget new−widget
Make the
new−widget name an alias for
old−widget, so that both names refer to the
same widget. The names have equal standing; if either is
deleted, the other remains. If there is already a widget
with the new−widget name, it is deleted.
−N widget [
function ]
Create a user−defined
widget. If there is already a widget with the specified
name, it is overwritten. When the new widget is invoked from
within the editor, the specified shell function is
called. If no function name is specified, it defaults to the
same name as the widget. For further information, see the
section Widgets in zshzle(1).
−C widget
completion−widget function
Create a user−defined
completion widget named widget. The completion widget
will behave like the built−in completion−widget
whose name is given as completion−widget. To
generate the completions, the shell function function
will be called. For further information, see
zshcompwid(1).
−R [
−c ] [ display−string ] [
string ... ]
Redisplay the command line;
this is to be called from within a user−defined widget
to allow changes to become visible. If a
display−string is given and not empty, this is
shown in the status line (immediately below the line being
edited).
If the optional
strings are given they are listed below the prompt in
the same way as completion lists are printed. If no
strings are given but the −c option is
used such a list is cleared.
Note that this
option is only useful for widgets that do not exit
immediately after using it because the strings displayed
will be erased immediately after return from the widget.
This command
can safely be called outside user defined widgets; if zle is
active, the display will be refreshed, while if zle is not
active, the command has no effect. In this case there will
usually be no other arguments. The status is zero if zle was
active, else one.
−M
string
As with the −R
option, the string will be displayed below the
command line; unlike the −R option, the string
will not be put into the status line but will instead be
printed normally below the prompt. This means that the
string will still be displayed after the widget
returns (until it is overwritten by subsequent
commands).
−U
string
This pushes the characters in
the string onto the input stack of ZLE. After the
widget currently executed finishes ZLE will behave as if the
characters in the string were typed by the user.
As ZLE uses a
stack, if this option is used repeatedly the last string
pushed onto the stack will be processed first. However, the
characters in each string will be processed in the
order in which they appear in the string.
|
−I |
|
Unusually, this option is only useful outside
ordinary widget functions. It invalidates the current zle
display in preparation for output; usually this will be from
a trap function. It has no effect if zle is not active. When
a trap exits, the shell checks to see if the display needs
restoring, hence the following will print output in such a
way as not to disturb the line being edited: |
TRAPUSR1() {
# Invalidate zle display
zle −I
# Show output
print Hello
}
Note that there
are better ways of manipulating the display from within zle
widgets. In general, the trap function may need to test
whether zle is loaded before using this method; if it is
not, there is no point in loading it specially since the
line editor will not be active.
The status is
zero if zle was active, else one.
widget [ −n
num ] [ −N ] args ...
Invoke the specified widget.
This can only be done when ZLE is active; normally this will
be within a user−defined widget.
With the
options −n and −N, the current
numerical argument will be saved and then restored after the
call to widget; ’−n
num’ sets the numerical argument temporarily to
num, while ’−N’ sets it to
the default, i.e. as if there were none.
Any further
arguments will be passed to the widget. If it is a shell
function, these are passed down as positional parameters;
for builtin widgets it is up to the widget in question what
it does with them. Currently arguments are only handled by
the incremental−search commands, the
history−search−forward and
−backward and the corresponding functions
prefixed by vi−, and by
universal−argument. No error is flagged if the
command does not use the arguments, or only uses some of
them.
The return
status reflects the success or failure of the operation
carried out by the widget, or if it is a user−defined
widget the return status of the shell function.
A
non−zero return status causes the shell to beep when
the widget exits, unless the BEEP options was unset
or the widget was called via the zle command. Thus if
a user defined widget requires an immediate beep, it should
call the beep widget directly.
With no options
and no arguments, only the return status will be set. It is
zero if ZLE is currently active and widgets could be invoked
using this builtin command and non−zero if ZLE is not
active.
WIDGETS
All actions in
the editor are performed by ’widgets’. A
widget’s job is simply to perform some small action.
The ZLE commands that key sequences in keymaps are bound to
are in fact widgets. Widgets can be user−defined or
built in.
The standard
widgets built in to ZLE are listed in Standard Widgets
below. Other built−in widgets can be defined by other
modules (see zshmodules(1)). Each built−in
widget has two names: its normal canonical name, and the
same name preceded by a ’.’. The
’.’ name is special: it can’t be
rebound to a different widget. This makes the widget
available even when its usual name has been redefined.
User−defined
widgets are defined using ’zle −N’,
and implemented as shell functions. When the widget is
executed, the corresponding shell function is executed, and
can perform editing (or other) actions. It is recommended
that user−defined widgets should not have names
starting with ’.’.
USER−DEFINED WIDGETS
User−defined
widgets, being implemented as shell functions, can execute
any normal shell command. They can also run other widgets
(whether built−in or user−defined) using the
zle builtin command. The standard input of the
function is closed to prevent external commands from
unintentionally blocking ZLE by reading from the terminal,
but read −k or read −q can be used
to read characters. Finally, they can examine and edit the
ZLE buffer being edited by reading and setting the special
parameters described below.
These special
parameters are always available in widget functions, but are
not in any way special outside ZLE. If they have some normal
value outside ZLE, that value is temporarily inaccessible,
but will return when the widget function exits. These
special parameters in fact have local scope, like parameters
created in a function using local.
Inside
completion widgets and traps called while ZLE is active,
these parameters are available read−only.
BUFFER (scalar)
The entire contents of the edit
buffer. If it is written to, the cursor remains at the same
offset, unless that would put it outside the buffer.
BUFFERLINES
The number of screen lines
needed for the edit buffer currently displayed on screen
(i.e. without any changes to the preceding parameters done
after the last redisplay).
CURSOR (integer)
The offset of the cursor,
within the edit buffer. This is in the range 0 to
$#BUFFER, and is by definition equal to
$#LBUFFER. Attempts to move the cursor outside the
buffer will result in the cursor being moved to the
appropriate end of the buffer.
HISTNO (integer)
The current history number.
KEYS (scalar)
The keys typed to invoke this
widget, as a literal string.
LASTWIDGET (scalar)
The name of the last widget
that was executed.
LBUFFER (scalar)
The part of the buffer that
lies to the left of the cursor position. If it is assigned
to, only that part of the buffer is replaced, and the cursor
remains between the new $LBUFFER and the old
$RBUFFER.
MARK (integer)
Like CURSOR, but for the
mark.
NUMERIC (integer)
The numeric argument. If no
numeric argument was given, this parameter is unset. When
this is set inside a widget function, builtin widgets called
with the zle builtin command will use the value
assigned. If it is unset inside a widget function, builtin
widgets called behave as if no numeric argument was
given.
PENDING (integer)
The number of bytes pending for
input, i.e. the number of bytes which have already been
typed and can immediately be read. On systems where the
shell is not able to get this information, this parameter
will always have a value of zero.
PREBUFFER (scalar)
In a multi−line input at
the secondary prompt, this read−only parameter
contains the contents of the lines before the one the cursor
is currently in.
RBUFFER (scalar)
The part of the buffer that
lies to the right of the cursor position. If it is assigned
to, only that part of the buffer is replaced, and the cursor
remains between the old $LBUFFER and the new
$RBUFFER.
WIDGET (scalar)
The name of the widget
currently being executed.
STANDARD WIDGETS
The following
is a list of all the standard widgets, and their default
bindings in emacs mode, vi command mode and vi insert mode
(the ’emacs’, ’vicmd’
and ’viins’ keymaps, respectively).
Note that
cursor keys are bound to movement keys in all three keymaps;
the shell assumes that the cursor keys send the key
sequences reported by the terminal−handling library
(termcap or terminfo). The key sequences shown in the list
are those based on the VT100, common on many modern
terminals, but in fact these are not necessarily bound. In
the case of the viins keymap, the initial escape
character of the sequences serves also to return to the
vicmd keymap: whether this happens is determined by
the KEYTIMEOUT parameter, see zshparam(1).
Movement
vi−backward−blank−word (unbound) (B)
(unbound)
Move backward one word, where a
word is defined as a series of non−blank
characters.
backward−char (^B
ESC−[D) (unbound) (unbound)
Move backward one
character.
vi−backward−char
(unbound) (^H h ^?) (ESC−[D)
Move backward one character,
without changing lines.
backward−word
(ESC−B ESC−b) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the beginning of the
previous word.
emacs−backward−word
Move to the beginning of the
previous word.
vi−backward−word
(unbound) (b) (unbound)
Move to the beginning of the
previous word, vi−style.
beginning−of−line
(^A) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the beginning of the
line. If already at the beginning of the line, move to the
beginning of the previous line, if any.
vi−beginning−of−line
Move to the beginning of the
line, without changing lines.
end−of−line
(^E) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the end of the line. If
already at the end of the line, move to the end of the next
line, if any.
vi−end−of−line
(unbound) ($) (unbound)
Move to the end of the line. If
an argument is given to this command, the cursor will be
moved to the end of the line (argument − 1) lines
down.
vi−forward−blank−word
(unbound) (W) (unbound)
Move forward one word, where a
word is defined as a series of non−blank
characters.
vi−forward−blank−word−end
(unbound) (E) (unbound)
Move to the end of the current
word, or, if at the end of the current word, to the end of
the next word, where a word is defined as a series of
non−blank characters.
forward−char (^F
ESC−[C) (unbound) (unbound)
Move forward one character.
vi−forward−char
(unbound) (space l) (ESC−[C)
Move forward one character.
vi−find−next−char
(^X^F) (f) (unbound)
Read a character from the
keyboard, and move to the next occurrence of it in the
line.
vi−find−next−char−skip
(unbound) (t) (unbound)
Read a character from the
keyboard, and move to the position just before the next
occurrence of it in the line.
vi−find−prev−char
(unbound) (F) (unbound)
Read a character from the
keyboard, and move to the previous occurrence of it in the
line.
vi−find−prev−char−skip
(unbound) (T) (unbound)
Read a character from the
keyboard, and move to the position just after the previous
occurrence of it in the line.
vi−first−non−blank
(unbound) (^) (unbound)
Move to the first
non−blank character in the line.
vi−forward−word
(unbound) (w) (unbound)
Move forward one word,
vi−style.
forward−word
(ESC−F ESC−f) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the beginning of the
next word. The editor’s idea of a word is specified
with the WORDCHARS parameter.
emacs−forward−word
Move to the end of the next
word.
vi−forward−word−end
(unbound) (e) (unbound)
Move to the end of the next
word.
vi−goto−column
(ESC−|) (|) (unbound)
Move to the column specified by
the numeric argument.
vi−goto−mark
(unbound) (’) (unbound)
Move to the specified mark.
vi−goto−mark−line
(unbound) (’) (unbound)
Move to beginning of the line
containing the specified mark.
vi−repeat−find
(unbound) (;) (unbound)
Repeat the last
vi−find command.
vi−rev−repeat−find
(unbound) (,) (unbound)
Repeat the last
vi−find command in the opposite direction.
History
Control
beginning−of−buffer−or−history
(ESC−<) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the beginning of the
buffer, or if already there, move to the first event in the
history list.
beginning−of−line−hist
Move to the beginning of the
line. If already at the beginning of the buffer, move to the
previous history line.
beginning−of−history
Move to the first event in the
history list.
down−line−or−history
(^N ESC−[B) (j) (ESC−[B)
Move down a line in the buffer,
or if already at the bottom line, move to the next event in
the history list.
vi−down−line−or−history
(unbound) (+) (unbound)
Move down a line in the buffer,
or if already at the bottom line, move to the next event in
the history list. Then move to the first non−blank
character on the line.
down−line−or−search
Move down a line in the buffer,
or if already at the bottom line, search forward in the
history for a line beginning with the first word in the
buffer.
If called from
a function by the zle command with arguments, the
first argument is taken as the string for which to search,
rather than the first word in the buffer.
down−history
(unbound) (^N) (unbound)
Move to the next event in the
history list.
history−beginning−search−backward
Search backward in the history
for a line beginning with the current line up to the cursor.
This leaves the cursor in its original position.
end−of−buffer−or−history
(ESC−>) (unbound) (unbound)
Move to the end of the buffer,
or if already there, move to the last event in the history
list.
end−of−line−hist
Move to the end of the line. If
already at the end of the buffer, move to the next history
line.
end−of−history
Move to the last event in the
history list.
vi−fetch−history
(unbound) (G) (unbound)
Fetch the history line
specified by the numeric argument. This defaults to the
current history line (i.e. the one that isn’t history
yet).
history−incremental−search−backward
(^R ^Xr) (unbound) (unbound)
Search backward incrementally
for a specified string. The search is case−insensitive
if the search string does not have uppercase letters and no
numeric argument was given. The string may begin with
’^’ to anchor the search to the beginning
of the line.
A restricted
set of editing functions is available in the
mini−buffer. An interrupt signal, as defined by the
stty setting, will stop the search and go back to the
original line. An undefined key will have the same effect.
The supported functions are:
backward−delete−char,
vi−backward−delete−char,
clear−screen, redisplay,
quoted−insert,
vi−quoted−insert,
accept−and−hold,
accept−and−infer−next−history,
accept−line and
accept−line−and−down−history.
magic−space
just inserts a space. vi−cmd−mode toggles
between the ’main’ and
’vicmd’ keymaps; the
’main’ keymap (insert mode) will be
selected initially.
history−incremental−search−backward
will get the next occurrence of the contents of the
mini−buffer.
history−incremental−search−forward
inverts the sense of the search.
vi−repeat−search and
vi−rev−repeat−search are similarly
supported. The direction of the search is indicated in the
mini−buffer.
Any
multi−character string that is not bound to one of the
above functions will beep and interrupt the search, leaving
the last found line in the buffer. Any single character that
is not bound to one of the above functions, or
self−insert or
self−insert−unmeta, will have the same
effect but the function will be executed.
When called
from a widget function by the zle command, the
incremental search commands can take a string argument. This
will be treated as a string of keys, as for arguments to the
bindkey command, and used as initial input for the
command. Any characters in the string which are unused by
the incremental search will be silently ignored. For
example,
zle
history−incremental−search−backward
forceps
will search
backwards for forceps, leaving the minibuffer
containing the string ’forceps’.
history−incremental−search−forward
(^S ^Xs) (unbound) (unbound)
Search forward incrementally
for a specified string. The search is case−insensitive
if the search string does not have uppercase letters and no
numeric argument was given. The string may begin with
’^’ to anchor the search to the beginning
of the line. The functions available in the
mini−buffer are the same as for
history−incremental−search−backward.
history−search−backward
(ESC−P ESC−p) (unbound) (unbound)
Search backward in the history
for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from
a function by the zle command with arguments, the
first argument is taken as the string for which to search,
rather than the first word in the buffer.
vi−history−search−backward
(unbound) (/) (unbound)
Search backward in the history
for a specified string. The string may begin with
’^’ to anchor the search to the beginning
of the line.
A restricted
set of editing functions is available in the
mini−buffer. An interrupt signal, as defined by the
stty setting, will stop the search. The functions available
in the mini−buffer are: accept−line,
backward−delete−char,
vi−backward−delete−char,
backward−kill−word,
vi−backward−kill−word,
clear−screen, redisplay,
quoted−insert and
vi−quoted−insert.
vi−cmd−mode
is treated the same as accept−line, and
magic−space is treated as a space. Any other
character that is not bound to self−insert or
self−insert−unmeta will beep and be ignored. If
the function is called from vi command mode, the bindings of
the current insert mode will be used.
If called from
a function by the zle command with arguments, the
first argument is taken as the string for which to search,
rather than the first word in the buffer.
history−search−forward
(ESC−N ESC−n) (unbound) (unbound)
Search forward in the history
for a line beginning with the first word in the buffer.
If called from
a function by the zle command with arguments, the
first argument is taken as the string for which to search,
rather than the first word in the buffer.
vi−history−search−forward
(unbound) (?) (unbound)
Search forward in the history
for a specified string. The string may begin with
’^’ to anchor the search to the beginning
of the line. The functions available in the
mini−buffer are the same as for
vi−history−search−backward.
Argument handling is also the same as for that command.
infer−next−history
(^X^N) (unbound) (unbound)
Search in the history list for
a line matching the current one and fetch the event
following it.
insert−last−word
(ESC−_ ESC−.) (unbound) (unbound)
Insert the last word from the
previous history event at the cursor position. If a positive
numeric argument is given, insert that word from the end of
the previous history event. If the argument is zero or
negative insert that word from the left (zero inserts the
previous command word). Repeating this command replaces the
word just inserted with the last word from the history event
prior to the one just used; numeric arguments can be used in
the same way to pick a word from that event.
vi−repeat−search
(unbound) (n) (unbound)
Repeat the last vi history
search.
vi−rev−repeat−search
(unbound) (N) (unbound)
Repeat the last vi history
search, but in reverse.
up−line−or−history
(^P ESC−[A) (k) (ESC−[A)
Move up a line in the buffer,
or if already at the top line, move to the previous event in
the history list.
vi−up−line−or−history
(unbound) (−) (unbound)
Move up a line in the buffer,
or if already at the top line, move to the previous event in
the history list. Then move to the first non−blank
character on the line.
up−line−or−search
Move up a line in the buffer,
or if already at the top line, search backward in the
history for a line beginning with the first word in the
buffer.
If called from
a function by the zle command with arguments, the
first argument is taken as the string for which to search,
rather than the first word in the buffer.
up−history
(unbound) (^P) (unbound)
Move to the previous event in
the history list.
history−beginning−search−forward
Search forward in the history
for a line beginning with the current line up to the cursor.
This leaves the cursor in its original position.
Modifying
Text
vi−add−eol (unbound) (A) (unbound)
Move to the end of the line and
enter insert mode.
vi−add−next
(unbound) (a) (unbound)
Enter insert mode after the
current cursor position, without changing lines.
backward−delete−char
(^H ^?) (unbound) (unbound)
Delete the character behind the
cursor.
vi−backward−delete−char
(unbound) (X) (^H)
Delete the character behind the
cursor, without changing lines. If in insert mode, this
won’t delete past the point where insert mode was last
entered.
backward−delete−word
Delete the word behind the
cursor.
backward−kill−line
Kill from the beginning of the
line to the cursor position.
backward−kill−word
(^W ESC−^H ESC−^?) (unbound) (unbound)
Kill the word behind the
cursor.
vi−backward−kill−word
(unbound) (unbound) (^W)
Kill the word behind the
cursor, without going past the point where insert mode was
last entered.
capitalize−word
(ESC−C ESC−c) (unbound) (unbound)
Capitalize the current word and
move past it.
vi−change
(unbound) (c) (unbound)
Read a movement command from
the keyboard, and kill from the cursor position to the
endpoint of the movement. Then enter insert mode. If the
command is vi−change, change the current
line.
vi−change−eol
(unbound) (C) (unbound)
Kill to the end of the line and
enter insert mode.
vi−change−whole−line
(unbound) (S) (unbound)
Kill the current line and enter
insert mode.
copy−region−as−kill
(ESC−W ESC−w) (unbound) (unbound)
Copy the area from the cursor
to the mark to the kill buffer.
copy−prev−word
(ESC−^_) (unbound) (unbound)
Duplicate the word to the left
of the cursor.
copy−prev−shell−word
(ESC−^_) (unbound) (unbound)
Like
copy−prev−word, but the word is found by
using shell parsing, whereas
copy−prev−word looks for blanks. This
makes a difference when the word is quoted and contains
spaces.
vi−delete
(unbound) (d) (unbound)
Read a movement command from
the keyboard, and kill from the cursor position to the
endpoint of the movement. If the command is
vi−delete, kill the current line.
delete−char
Delete the character under the
cursor.
vi−delete−char
(unbound) (x) (unbound)
Delete the character under the
cursor, without going past the end of the line.
delete−word
Delete the current word.
down−case−word
(ESC−L ESC−l) (unbound) (unbound)
Convert the current word to all
lowercase and move past it.
kill−word
(ESC−D ESC−d) (unbound) (unbound)
Kill the current word.
gosmacs−transpose−chars
Exchange the two characters
behind the cursor.
vi−indent
(unbound) (>) (unbound)
Indent a number of lines.
vi−insert
(unbound) (i) (unbound)
Enter insert mode.
vi−insert−bol
(unbound) (I) (unbound)
Move to the first
non−blank character on the line and enter insert
mode.
vi−join (^X^J) (J)
(unbound)
Join the current line with the
next one.
kill−line (^K)
(unbound) (unbound)
Kill from the cursor to the end
of the line. If already on the end of the line, kill the
newline character.
vi−kill−line
(unbound) (unbound) (^U)
Kill from the cursor back to
wherever insert mode was last entered.
vi−kill−eol
(unbound) (D) (unbound)
Kill from the cursor to the end
of the line.
kill−region
Kill from the cursor to the
mark.
kill−buffer (^X^K)
(unbound) (unbound)
Kill the entire buffer.
kill−whole−line
(^U) (unbound) (unbound)
Kill the current line.
vi−match−bracket
(^X^B) (%) (unbound)
Move to the bracket character
(one of {}, () or []) that matches the
one under the cursor. If the cursor is not on a bracket
character, move forward without going past the end of the
line to find one, and then go to the matching bracket.
vi−open−line−above
(unbound) (O) (unbound)
Open a line above the cursor
and enter insert mode.
vi−open−line−below
(unbound) (o) (unbound)
Open a line below the cursor
and enter insert mode.
vi−oper−swap−case
Read a movement command from
the keyboard, and swap the case of all characters from the
cursor position to the endpoint of the movement. If the
movement command is
vi−oper−swap−case, swap the case of
all characters on the current line.
overwrite−mode
(^X^O) (unbound) (unbound)
Toggle between overwrite mode
and insert mode.
vi−put−before
(unbound) (P) (unbound)
Insert the contents of the kill
buffer before the cursor. If the kill buffer contains a
sequence of lines (as opposed to characters), paste it above
the current line.
vi−put−after
(unbound) (p) (unbound)
Insert the contents of the kill
buffer after the cursor. If the kill buffer contains a
sequence of lines (as opposed to characters), paste it below
the current line.
quoted−insert (^V)
(unbound) (unbound)
Insert the next character typed
into the buffer literally. An interrupt character will not
be inserted.
vi−quoted−insert
(unbound) (unbound) (^Q ^V)
Display a
’^’ at the cursor position, and insert
the next character typed into the buffer literally. An
interrupt character will not be inserted.
quote−line
(ESC−’) (unbound) (unbound)
Quote the current line; that
is, put a ’’’ character at the
beginning and the end, and convert all
’’’ characters to
’’\’’’.
quote−region
(ESC−") (unbound) (unbound)
Quote the region from the
cursor to the mark.
vi−replace
(unbound) (R) (unbound)
Enter overwrite mode.
vi−repeat−change
(unbound) (.) (unbound)
Repeat the last vi mode text
modification. If a count was used with the modification, it
is remembered. If a count is given to this command, it
overrides the remembered count, and is remembered for future
uses of this command. The cut buffer specification is
similarly remembered.
vi−replace−chars
(unbound) (r) (unbound)
Replace the character under the
cursor with a character read from the keyboard.
self−insert
(printable characters) (unbound) (printable characters and
some control characters)
Insert a character into the
buffer at the cursor position.
self−insert−unmeta
(ESC−^I ESC−^J ESC−^M) (unbound)
(unbound)
Insert a character into the
buffer after stripping the meta bit and converting ^M to
^J.
vi−substitute
(unbound) (s) (unbound)
Substitute the next
character(s).
vi−swap−case
(unbound) (~) (unbound)
Swap the case of the character
under the cursor and move past it.
transpose−chars
(^T) (unbound) (unbound)
Exchange the two characters to
the left of the cursor if at end of line, else exchange the
character under the cursor with the character to the
left.
transpose−words
(ESC−T ESC−t) (unbound) (unbound)
Exchange the current word with
the one before it.
vi−unindent
(unbound) (<) (unbound)
Unindent a number of lines.
up−case−word
(ESC−U ESC−u) (unbound) (unbound)
Convert the current word to all
caps and move past it.
yank (^Y) (unbound)
(unbound)
Insert the contents of the kill
buffer at the cursor position.
yank−pop
(ESC−y) (unbound) (unbound)
Remove the text just yanked,
rotate the kill−ring, and yank the new top. Only works
following yank or yank−pop.
vi−yank (unbound)
(y) (unbound)
Read a movement command from
the keyboard, and copy the region from the cursor position
to the endpoint of the movement into the kill buffer. If the
command is vi−yank, copy the current line.
vi−yank−whole−line
(unbound) (Y) (unbound)
Copy the current line into the
kill buffer.
vi−yank−eol
Copy the region from the cursor
position to the end of the line into the kill buffer.
Arguably, this is what Y should do in vi, but it isn’t
what it actually does.
Arguments
digit−argument (ESC−0..ESC−9)
(1−9) (unbound)
Start a new numeric argument,
or add to the current one. See also
vi−digit−or−beginning−of−line.
This only works if bound to a key sequence ending in a
decimal digit.
Inside a widget
function, a call to this function treats the last key of the
key sequence which called the widget as the digit.
neg−argument
(ESC−−) (unbound) (unbound)
Changes the sign of the
following argument.
universal−argument
Multiply the argument of the
next command by 4. Alternatively, if this command is
followed by an integer (positive or negative), use that as
the argument for the next command. Thus digits cannot be
repeated using this command. For example, if this command
occurs twice, followed immediately by
forward−char, move forward sixteen spaces; if
instead it is followed by −2, then
forward−char, move backward two spaces.
Inside a widget
function, if passed an argument, i.e. ’zle
universal−argument num’, the
numerical argument will be set to num; this is
equivalent to ’NUMERIC=num’.
Completion
accept−and−menu−complete
In a menu completion, insert
the current completion into the buffer, and advance to the
next possible completion.
complete−word
Attempt completion on the
current word.
delete−char−or−list
(^D) (unbound) (unbound)
Delete the character under the
cursor. If the cursor is at the end of the line, list
possible completions for the current word.
expand−cmd−path
Expand the current command to
its full pathname.
expand−or−complete
(TAB) (unbound) (TAB)
Attempt shell expansion on the
current word. If that fails, attempt completion.
expand−or−complete−prefix
Attempt shell expansion on the
current word up to cursor.
expand−history
(ESC−space ESC−!) (unbound) (unbound)
Perform history expansion on
the edit buffer.
expand−word (^X*)
(unbound) (unbound)
Attempt shell expansion on the
current word.
list−choices
(ESC−^D) (^D =) (^D)
List possible completions for
the current word.
list−expand (^Xg
^XG) (^G) (^G)
List the expansion of the
current word.
magic−space
Perform history expansion and
insert a space into the buffer. This is intended to be bound
to space.
menu−complete
Like
complete−word, except that menu completion is
used. See the MENU_COMPLETE option.
menu−expand−or−complete
Like
expand−or−complete, except that menu
completion is used.
reverse−menu−complete
Perform menu completion, like
menu−complete, except that if a menu completion
is already in progress, move to the previous
completion rather than the next.
end−of−list
When a previous completion
displayed a list below the prompt, this widget can be used
to move the prompt below the list.
Miscellaneous
accept−and−hold (ESC−A ESC−a)
(unbound) (unbound)
Push the contents of the buffer
on the buffer stack and execute it.
accept−and−infer−next−history
Execute the contents of the
buffer. Then search the history list for a line matching the
current one and push the event following onto the buffer
stack.
accept−line (^J
^M) (^J ^M) (^J ^M)
Finish editing the buffer.
Normally this causes the buffer to be executed as a shell
command.
accept−line−and−down−history
(^O) (unbound) (unbound)
Execute the current line, and
push the next history event on the the buffer stack.
|
beep |
|
Beep, unless the BEEP option is unset. |
|
vi−cmd−mode
(^X^V) (unbound) (^[)
Enter command mode; that is,
select the ’vicmd’ keymap. Yes, this is
bound by default in emacs mode.
vi−caps−lock−panic
Hang until any lowercase key is
pressed. This is for vi users without the mental capacity to
keep track of their caps lock key (like the author).
clear−screen (^L
ESC−^L) (^L) (^L)
Clear the screen and redraw the
prompt.
describe−key−briefly
Reads a key sequence, then
prints the function bound to that sequence.
exchange−point−and−mark
(^X^X) (unbound) (unbound)
Exchange the cursor position
with the position of the mark.
execute−named−cmd
(ESC−x) (unbound) (unbound)
Read the name of an editor
command and execute it. A restricted set of editing
functions is available in the mini−buffer. An
interrupt signal, as defined by the stty setting, will abort
the function. The allowed functions are:
backward−delete−char,
vi−backward−delete−char,
clear−screen, redisplay,
quoted−insert,
vi−quoted−insert,
backward−kill−word,
vi−backward−kill−word,
kill−whole−line,
vi−kill−line,
backward−kill−line,
list−choices,
delete−char−or−list,
complete−word, accept−line,
expand−or−complete and
expand−or−complete−prefix.
kill−region
kills the last word, and vi−cmd−mode is treated
the same as accept−line. The space and tab characters,
if not bound to one of these functions, will complete the
name and then list the possibilities if the AUTO_LIST
option is set. Any other character that is not bound to
self−insert or
self−insert−unmeta will beep and be
ignored. The bindings of the current insert mode will be
used.
execute−last−named−cmd
(ESC−z) (unbound) (unbound)
Redo the last function executed
with execute−named−cmd.
get−line
(ESC−G ESC−g) (unbound) (unbound)
Pop the top line off the buffer
stack and insert it at the cursor position.
pound−insert
(unbound) (#) (unbound)
If there is no # character at
the beginning of the buffer, add one to the beginning of
each line. If there is one, remove a # from each line that
has one. In either case, accept the current line. The
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS option must be set for this to
have any usefulness.
vi−pound−insert
If there is no # character at
the beginning of the current line, add one. If there is one,
remove it. The INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS option must be
set for this to have any usefulness.
push−input
Push the entire current
multiline construct onto the buffer stack and return to the
top−level (PS1) prompt. If the current parser
construct is only a single line, this is exactly like
push−line. Next time the editor starts up or is
popped with get−line, the construct will be
popped off the top of the buffer stack and loaded into the
editing buffer.
push−line (^Q
ESC−Q ESC−q) (unbound) (unbound)
Push the current buffer onto
the buffer stack and clear the buffer. Next time the editor
starts up, the buffer will be popped off the top of the
buffer stack and loaded into the editing buffer.
push−line−or−edit
At the top−level
(PS1) prompt, equivalent to push−line.
At a secondary (PS2) prompt, move the entire current
multiline construct into the editor buffer. The latter is
equivalent to push−input followed by
get−line.
redisplay (unbound) (^R)
(^R)
Redisplays the edit buffer.
send−break (^G
ESC−^G) (unbound) (unbound)
Abort the current editor
function, e.g. execute−named−command, or
the editor itself, e.g. if you are in vared.
Otherwise abort the parsing of the current line.
run−help
(ESC−H ESC−h) (unbound) (unbound)
Push the buffer onto the buffer
stack, and execute the command ’run−help
cmd’, where cmd is the current command.
run−help is normally aliased to man.
vi−set−buffer
(unbound) (") (unbound)
Specify a buffer to be used in
the following command. There are 35 buffers that can be
specified: the 26 ’named’ buffers "a
to "z and the nine ’queued’ buffers
"1 to "9. The named buffers can also
be specified as "A to "Z.
When a buffer
is specified for a cut command, the text being cut replaces
the previous contents of the specified buffer. If a named
buffer is specified using a capital, the newly cut text is
appended to the buffer instead of overwriting it.
If no buffer is
specified for a cut command, "1 is used, and the
contents of "1 to "8 are each
shifted along one buffer; the contents of "9 is
lost.
vi−set−mark
(unbound) (m) (unbound)
Set the specified mark at the
cursor position.
set−mark−command
(^@) (unbound) (unbound)
Set the mark at the cursor
position.
spell−word
(ESC−$ ESC−S ESC−s) (unbound)
(unbound)
Attempt spelling correction on
the current word.
undefined−key
This command is executed when a
key sequence that is not bound to any command is typed. By
default it beeps.
undo (^_ ^Xu ^X^U)
(unbound) (unbound)
Incrementally undo the last
text modification.
|
redo |
|
Incrementally redo undone text modifications. |
|
vi−undo−change
(unbound) (u) (unbound)
Undo the last text
modification. If repeated, redo the modification.
what−cursor−position
(^X=) (unbound) (unbound)
Print the character under the
cursor, its code as an octal, decimal and hexadecimal
number, the current cursor position within the buffer and
the column of the cursor in the current line.
where−is
Read the name of an editor
command and and print the listing of key sequences that
invoke the specified command.
which−command
(ESC−?) (unbound) (unbound)
Push the buffer onto the buffer
stack, and execute the command
’which−command cmd’. where
cmd is the current command.
which−command is normally aliased to
whence.
vi−digit−or−beginning−of−line
(unbound) (0) (unbound)
If the last command executed
was a digit as part of an argument, continue the argument.
Otherwise, execute
vi−beginning−of−line.
NAME
zshcompwid − zsh
completion widgets
DESCRIPTION
The
shell’s programmable completion mechanism can be
manipulated in two ways; here the low−level features
supporting the newer, function−based mechanism are
defined. A complete set of shell functions based on these
features is described in zshcompsys(1), and users
with no interest in adding to that system (or, potentially,
writing their own −−− see dictionary entry
for ’hubris’) should skip this section. The
older system based on the compctl builtin command is
described in zshcompctl(1).
Completion
widgets are defined by the −C option to the
zle builtin command provided by the zsh/zle
module (see zshzle(1)). For example,
zle −C
complete expand−or−complete completer
defines a
widget named ’complete’. The second
argument is the name of any of the builtin widgets that
handle completions: complete−word,
expand−or−complete,
expand−or−complete−prefix,
menu−complete,
menu−expand−or−complete,
reverse−menu−complete,
list−choices, or
delete−char−or−list. Note that this
will still work even if the widget in question has been
re−bound.
When this newly
defined widget is bound to a key using the bindkey
builtin command defined in the zsh/zle module (see
zshzle(1)), typing that key will call the shell
function ’completer’. This function is
responsible for generating the possible matches using the
builtins described below. As with other ZLE widgets, the
function is called with its standard input closed.
Once the
function returns, the completion code takes over control
again and treats the matches in the same manner as the
specified builtin widget, in this case
expand−or−complete.
SPECIAL PARAMETERS
Inside
completion widgets, and any functions called from them, some
parameters have special meaning; outside these functions
they are not special to the shell in any way. These
parameters are used to pass information between the
completion code and the completion widget. Some of the
builtin commands and the condition codes use or change the
current values of these parameters. Any existing values will
be hidden during execution of completion widgets; except for
compstate, the parameters are reset on each function
exit (including nested function calls from within the
completion widget) to the values they had when the function
was entered.
CURRENT
This is the number of the
current word, i.e. the word the cursor is currently on in
the words array. Note that this value is only correct
if the ksharrays option is not set.
IPREFIX
Initially this will be set to
the empty string. This parameter functions like
PREFIX; it contains a string which precedes the one
in PREFIX and is not considered part of the list of
matches. Typically, a string is transferred from the
beginning of PREFIX to the end of IPREFIX, for
example:
IPREFIX=${PREFIX%%\=*}=
PREFIX=${PREFIX#*=}
causes the part
of the prefix up to and including the first equal sign not
to be treated as part of a matched string. This can be done
automatically by the compset builtin, see below.
ISUFFIX
As IPREFIX, but for a
suffix that should not be considered part of the matches;
note that the ISUFFIX string follows the
SUFFIX string.
|
PREFIX |
|
Initially this will be set to the part of the current
word from the beginning of the word up to the position of
the cursor; it may be altered to give a common prefix for
all matches. |
QIPREFIX
This parameter is
read−only and contains the quoted string up to the
word being completed. E.g. when completing
’"foo’, this parameter contains the
double quote. If the −q option of
compset is used (see below), and the original string
was ’"foo bar’ with the cursor on
the ’bar’, this parameter contains
’"foo ’.
QISUFFIX
Like QIPREFIX, but
containing the suffix.
|
SUFFIX |
|
Initially this will be set to the part of the current
word from the cursor position to the end; it may be altered
to give a common suffix for all matches. It is most useful
when the option COMPLETE_IN_WORD is set, as otherwise
the whole word on the command line is treated as a
prefix. |
compstate
This is an associative array
with various keys and values that the completion code uses
to exchange information with the completion widget. The keys
are:
all_quotes
The −q option of
the compset builtin command (see below) allows a
quoted string to be broken into separate words; if the
cursor is on one of those words, that word will be
completed, possibly invoking ’compset
−q’ recursively. With this key it is
possible to test the types of quoted strings which are
currently broken into parts in this fashion. Its value
contains one character for each quoting level. The
characters are a single quote or a double quote for strings
quoted with these characters and a backslash for strings not
starting with a quote character. The first character in the
value always corresponds to the innermost quoting level.
context
This will be set by the
completion code to the overall context in which completion
is attempted. Possible values are:
array_value
when completing inside the
value of an array parameter assignment; in this case the
words array contains the words inside the
parentheses.
brace_parameter
when completing the name of a
parameter in a parameter expansion beginning with
${.
command
when completing for a normal
command (either in command position or for an argument of
the command).
condition
when completing inside a
’[[...]]’ conditional expression;
in this case the words array contains only the words
inside the conditional expression.
|
math |
|
when completing in a mathematical environment such as a
’((...))’ construct. |
parameter
when completing the name of a
parameter in a parameter expansion beginning with $
but not ${.
redirect
when completing after a
redirection operator.
subscript
when completing inside a
parameter subscript.
|
value |
|
when completing the value of a parameter assignment. |
|
exact |
|
|
Controls the
behaviour when the REC_EXACT option is set. It will
be set to accept if an exact match would be accepted,
and will be unset otherwise.
If it was set
when at least one match equal to the string on the line was
generated, the match is accepted.
exact_string
The string of an exact match if
one was found, otherwise unset.
ignored
The number of words that were
ignored because they matched one of the patterns given with
the −F option to the compadd builtin
command.
|
insert |
|
This controls the manner in which a match is inserted
into the command line. On entry to the widget function, if
it is unset the command line is not to be changed; if set to
unambiguous, any prefix common to all matches is to
be inserted; if set to automenu−unambiguous,
the common prefix is to be inserted and the next invocation
of the completion code may start menu completion (due to the
AUTO_MENU option being set); if set to menu or
automenu menu completion will be started for the
matches currently generated (in the latter case this will
happen because the AUTO_MENU is set). The value may
also contain the string ’tab’ when the
completion code would normally not really do completion, but
only insert the TAB character. |
On exit it may
be set to any of the values above (where setting it to the
empty string is the same as unsetting it), or to a number,
in which case the match whose number is given will be
inserted into the command line. Negative numbers count
backward from the last match (with
’−1’ selecting the last match) and
out−of−range values are wrapped around, so that
a value of zero selects the last match and a value one more
than the maximum selects the first. Unless the value of this
key ends in a space, the match is inserted as in a menu
completion, i.e. without automatically appending a
space.
Both
menu and automenu may also specify the the
number of the match to insert, given after a colon. For
example, ’menu:2’ says to start menu
completion, beginning with the second match.
Note that a
value containing the substring ’tab’
makes the matches generated be ignored and only the TAB be
inserted.
Finally, it may
also be set to all, which makes all matches generated
be inserted into the line.
insert_positions
When the completion system
inserts an unambiguous string into the line, there may be
multiple places where characters are missing or where the
character inserted differs from at least one match. The
value of this key contains a colon separated list of all
these positions, as indexes into the command line.
last_prompt
If this is set to a
non−empty string for every match added, the completion
code will move the cursor back to the previous prompt after
the list of completions has been displayed. Initially this
is set or unset according to the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT
option.
|
list |
|
This controls whether or how the list of matches will be
displayed. If it is unset or empty they will never be
listed; if its value begins with list, they will
always be listed; if it begins with autolist or
ambiguous, they will be listed when the
AUTO_LIST or LIST_AMBIGUOUS options
respectively would normally cause them to be. |
If the
substring force appears in the value, this makes the
list be shown even if there is only one match. Normally, the
list would be shown only if there are at least two
matches.
The value
contains the substring packed if the
LIST_PACKED option is set. If this substring is given
for all matches added to a group, this group will show the
LIST_PACKED behavior. The same is done for the
LIST_ROWS_FIRST option with the substring
rows.
Finally, if the
value contains the string explanations, only the
explanation strings, if any, will be listed and if it
contains messages, only the messages (added with the
−x option of compadd) will be listed. If
it contains both explanations and messages
both kinds of explanation strings will be listed. It will be
set appropriately on entry to a completion widget and may be
changed there.
list_lines
This gives the number of lines
that are needed to display the full list of completions.
Note that to calculate the total number of lines to display
you need to add the number of lines needed for the command
line to this value, this is available as the value of the
BUFFERLINES special parameter.
list_max
Initially this is set to the
value of the LISTMAX parameter. It may be set to any
other value; when the widget exits this value will be used
in the same way as the value of LISTMAX.
nmatches
The number of matches generated
and accepted by the completion code so far.
old_insert
On entry to the widget this
will be set to the number of the match of an old list of
completions that is currently inserted into the command
line. If no match has been inserted, this is unset.
As with
old_list, the value of this key will only be used if
it is the string keep. If it was set to this value by
the widget and there was an old match inserted into the
command line, this match will be kept and if the value of
the insert key specifies that another match should be
inserted, this will be inserted after the old one.
old_list
This is set to yes if
there is still a valid list of completions from a previous
completion at the time the widget is invoked. This will
usually be the case if and only if the previous editing
operation was a completion widget or one of the builtin
completion functions. If there is a valid list and it is
also currently shown on the screen, the value of this key is
shown.
After the
widget has exited the value of this key is only used if it
was set to keep. In this case the completion code
will continue to use this old list. If the widget generated
new matches, they will not be used.
parameter
The name of the parameter when
completing in a subscript or in the value of a parameter
assignment.
pattern_insert
Normally this is set to
menu, which specifies that menu completion will be
used whenever a set of matches was generated using pattern
matching. If it is set to any other non−empty string
by the user and menu completion is not selected by other
option settings, the code will instead insert any common
prefix for the generated matches as with normal
completion.
pattern_match
Locally controls the behaviour
given by the GLOB_COMPLETE option. Initially it is
set to ’*’ if and only if the option is
set. The completion widget may set it to this value, to an
empty string (which has the same effect as unsetting it), or
to any other non−empty string. If it is
non−empty, unquoted metacharacters on the command line
will be treated as patterns; if it is
’*’, then additionally a wildcard
’*’ is assumed at the cursor position; if
it is empty or unset, metacharacters will be treated
literally.
Note that the
matcher specifications given to the compadd builtin
command are not used if this is set to a non−empty
string.
|
quote |
|
When completing inside quotes, this contains the
quotation character (i.e. either a single quote, a double
quote, or a backtick). Otherwise it is unset. |
quoting
When completing inside single
quotes, this is set to the string single; inside
double quotes, the string double; inside backticks,
the string backtick. Otherwise it is unset.
redirect
The redirection operator when
completing in a redirection position, i.e. one of
<, >, etc.
restore
This is set to auto
before a function is entered, which forces the special
parameters mentioned above (words, CURRENT,
PREFIX, IPREFIX, SUFFIX, and
ISUFFIX) to be restored to their previous values when
the function exits. If a function unsets it or sets it to
any other string, they will not be restored.
|
to_end |
|
Specifies the occasions on which the cursor is moved to
the end of a string when a match is inserted. On entry to a
widget function, it may be single if this will happen
when a single unambiguous match was inserted or match
if it will happen any time a match is inserted (for example,
by menu completion; this is likely to be the effect of the
ALWAYS_TO_END option). |
On exit, it may
be set to single as above. It may also be set to
always, or to the empty string or unset; in those
cases the cursor will be moved to the end of the string
always or never respectively. Any other string is treated as
match.
unambiguous
This key is read−only and
will always be set to the common (unambiguous) prefix the
completion code has generated for all matches added so
far.
unambiguous_cursor
This gives the position the
cursor would be placed at if the common prefix in the
unambiguous key were inserted, relative to the value
of that key. The cursor would be placed before the character
whose index is given by this key.
unambiguous_positions
This contains all positions
where characters in the unambiguous string are missing or
where the character inserted differs from at least one of
the matches. The positions are given as indexes into the
string given by the value of the unambiguous key.
|
vared |
|
If completion is called while editing a line using the
vared builtin, the value of this key is set to the
name of the parameter given as an argument to vared.
This key is only set while a vared command is
active. |
|
words |
|
|
This array
contains the words present on the command line currently
being edited.
BUILTIN COMMANDS
compadd
[ −akqQfenUl12C ] [ −F
array ]
[ −P prefix ] [ −S
suffix ]
[ −p hidden−prefix ] [
−s hidden−suffix ]
[ −i ignored−prefix ] [
−I ignored−suffix ]
[ −W file−prefix ] [
−d array ]
[ −J name ] [ −V
name ] [ −X explanation ] [
−x message ]
[ −r remove−chars ] [
−R remove−func ]
[ −D array ] [ −O
array ] [ −A array ]
[ −M match−spec ] [
−− ] [ words ... ]
This builtin
command can be used to add matches directly and control all
the information the completion code stores with each
possible match. The return value is zero if at least one
match was added and non−zero if no matches were
added.
The completion
code breaks the string to complete into seven fields in the
order:
<ipre><apre><hpre><word><hsuf><asuf><isuf>
The first field
is an ignored prefix taken from the command line, the
contents of the IPREFIX parameter plus the string
given with the −i option. With the
−U option, only the string from the
−i option is used. The field
<apre> is an optional prefix string given with
the −P option. The <hpre> field is
a string that is considered part of the match but that
should not be shown when listing completions, given with the
−p option; for example, functions that do
filename generation might specify a common path prefix this
way. <word> is the part of the match that
should appear in the list of completions, i.e. one of the
words given at the end of the compadd command
line. The suffixes <hsuf>, <asuf>
and <isuf> correspond to the prefixes
<hpre>, <apre> and
<ipre> and are given by the options
−s, −S and −I,
respectively.
The supported
flags are:
−P prefix
This gives a string to be
inserted before the given words. The string given is
not considered as part of the match and any shell
metacharacters in it will not be quoted when the string is
inserted.
−S
suffix
Like −P, but gives
a string to be inserted after the match.
−p
hidden−prefix
This gives a string that should
be inserted into the command line before the match but that
should not appear in the list of matches. Unless the
−U option is given, this string must be matched
as part of the string on the command line.
−s
hidden−suffix
Like
’−p’, but gives a string to insert
after the match.
−i
ignored−prefix
This gives a string to insert
into the command line just before any string given with the
’−P’ option. Without
’−P’ the string is inserted before
the string given with ’−p’ or
directly before the match.
−I
ignored−suffix
Like −i, but gives
an ignored suffix.
|
−a |
|
With this flag the words are taken as names of
arrays and the possible matches are their values. If only
some elements of the arrays are needed, the words may
also contain subscripts, as in
’foo[2,−1]’. |
|
−k |
|
With this flag the words are taken as names of
associative arrays and the possible matches are their keys.
As for −a, the words may also contain
subscripts, as in ’foo[(R)*bar*]’. |
−d
array
This adds per−match
display strings. The array should contain one element
per word given. The completion code will then display
the first element instead of the first word, and so
on. The array may be given as the name of an array
parameter or directly as a space−separated list of
words in parentheses.
If there are
fewer display strings than words, the leftover
words will be displayed unchanged and if there are
more display strings than words, the leftover display
strings will be silently ignored.
|
−l |
|
This option only has an effect if used together with the
−d option. If it is given, the display strings
are listed one per line, not arrayed in columns. |
−J name
Gives the name of the group of
matches the words should be stored in.
−V name
Like −J but naming
a unsorted group. These are in a different name space than
groups created with the −J flag.
|
−1 |
|
If given together with the −V option, makes
only consecutive duplicates in the group be removed. If
combined with the −J option, this has no
visible effect. Note that groups with and without this flag
are in different name spaces. |
|
−2 |
|
If given together with the −J or
−V option, makes all duplicates be kept. Again,
groups with and without this flag are in different name
spaces. |
−X
explanation
The explanation string
will be printed with the list of matches, above the group
currently selected.
−x
message
Like −X, but the
message will be printed even if there are no matches
in the group.
|
−q |
|
The suffix given with −S will be
automatically removed if the next character typed is a blank
or does not insert anything, or if the suffix consists of
only one character and the next character typed is the same
character. |
−r
remove−chars
This is a more versatile form
of the −q option. The suffix given with
−S or the slash automatically added after
completing directories will be automatically removed if the
next character typed inserts one of the characters given in
the remove−chars. This string is parsed as a
characters class and understands the backslash sequences
used by the print command. For example,
’−r "a−z\t"’
removes the suffix if the next character typed inserts a
lowercase character or a TAB, and ’−r
"^0−9"’ removes the suffix if the
next character typed inserts anything but a digit. One extra
backslash sequence is understood in this string:
’\−’ stands for all characters that
insert nothing. Thus ’−S "="
−q’ is the same as ’−S
"=" −r "=
\t\n\−"’.
−R
remove−func
This is another form of the
−r option. When a suffix has been inserted and
the completion accepted, the function
remove−func will be called after the next
character typed. It is passed the length of the suffix as an
argument and can use the special parameters available in
ordinary (non−completion) zle widgets (see
zshzle(1)) to analyse and modify the command
line.
|
−f |
|
If this flag is given, all of the matches built from
words are marked as being the names of files. They
are not required to be actual filenames, but if they are,
and the option LIST_TYPES is set, the characters
describing the types of the files in the completion lists
will be shown. This also forces a slash to be added when the
name of a directory is completed. |
|
−e |
|
This flag can be used to tell the completion code that
the matches added are parameter names for a parameter
expansion. This will make the AUTO_PARAM_SLASH and
AUTO_PARAM_KEYS options be used for the matches. |
−W
file−prefix
This string is a pathname that
will be prepended to each of the matches formed by the given
words together with any prefix specified by the
−p option to form a complete filename for
testing. Hence it is only useful if combined with the
−f flag, as the tests will not otherwise be
performed.
−F
array
Specifies an array containing
patterns. Words matching one of these patterns are ignored,
i.e. not considered to be possible matches.
The
array may be the name of an array parameter or a list
of literal patterns enclosed in parentheses and quoted, as
in ’−F "(*?.o *?.h)"’. If
the name of an array is given, the elements of the array are
taken as the patterns.
|
−Q |
|
This flag instructs the completion code not to quote any
metacharacters in the words when inserting them into the
command line. |
−M
match−spec
This gives local match
specifications as described below in the section
’Matching Control’. This option may be given
more than once. In this case all match−specs
given are concatenated with spaces between them to form the
specification string to use. Note that they will only be
used if the −U option is not given.
|
−n |
|
Specifies that the words added are to be used as
possible matches, but are not to appear in the completion
listing. |
|
−U |
|
If this flag is given, all words given will be accepted
and no matching will be done by the completion code.
Normally this is used in functions that do the matching
themselves. |
−O
array
If this option is given, the
words are not added to the set of possible
completions. Instead, matching is done as usual and all of
the words given as arguments that match the string on
the command line will be stored in the array parameter whose
name is given as array.
−A
array
As the −O option,
except that instead of those of the words which match
being stored in array, the strings generated
internally by the completion code are stored. For example,
with a matching specification of ’−M
"L:|no="’, the string
’nof’ on the command line and the string
’foo’ as one of the words, this
option stores the string ’nofoo’ in the
array, whereas the −O option stores the
’foo’ originally given.
−D
array
As with −O, the
words are not added to the set of possible
completions. Instead, the completion code tests whether each
word in turn matches what is on the line. If the
n’th word does not match, the
n’th element of the array is removed.
Elements for which the corresponding word is matched
are retained.
|
−C |
|
This option adds a special match which expands to all
other matches when inserted into the line, even those that
are added after this option is used. Together with the
−d option it is possible to specify a string
that should be displayed in the list for this special match.
If no string is given, it will be shown as a string
containing the strings that would be inserted for the other
matches, truncated to the width of the screen. |
|
− |
|
|
|
−− |
|
This flag ends the list of flags and options. All
arguments after it will be taken as the words to use as
matches even if they begin with hyphens. |
Except for the
−M flag, if any of these flags is given more
than once, the first one (and its argument) will be
used.
compset −p
number
compset −P [ number ] pattern
compset −s number
compset −S [ number ] pattern
compset −n begin [ end ]
compset −N beg−pat [
end−pat ]
compset −q
This command simplifies
modification of the special parameters, while its return
value allows tests on them to be carried out.
The options
are:
−p number
If the contents of the
PREFIX parameter is longer than number
characters, the first number characters are removed
from it and appended to the contents of the IPREFIX
parameter.
−P [ number
] pattern
If the value of the
PREFIX parameter begins with anything that matches
the pattern, the matched portion is removed from
PREFIX and appended to IPREFIX.
Without the
optional number, the longest match is taken, but if
number is given, anything up to the
number’th match is moved. If the number
is negative, the number’th longest match is
moved. For example, if PREFIX contains the string
’a=b=c’, then compset −P
’*\=’ will move the string
’a=b=’ into the IPREFIX parameter,
but compset −P 1 ’*\=’ will move
only the string ’a=’.
−s
number
As −p, but
transfer the last number characters from the value of
SUFFIX to the front of the value of
ISUFFIX.
−S [ number
] pattern
As −P, but match
the last portion of SUFFIX and transfer the matched
portion to the front of the value of ISUFFIX.
−n begin [
end ]
If the current word position as
specified by the parameter CURRENT is greater than or
equal to begin, anything up to the
begin’th word is removed from the words
array and the value of the parameter CURRENT is
decremented by begin.
If the optional
end is given, the modification is done only if the
current word position is also less than or equal to
end. In this case, the words from position end
onwards are also removed from the words array.
Both
begin and end may be negative to count
backwards from the last element of the words
array.
−N
beg−pat [ end−pat ]
If one of the elements of the
words array before the one at the index given by the
value of the parameter CURRENT matches the pattern
beg−pat, all elements up to and including the
matching one are removed from the words array and the
value of CURRENT is changed to point to the same word
in the changed array.
If the optional
pattern end−pat is also given, and there is an
element in the words array matching this pattern, the
parameters are modified only if the index of this word is
higher than the one given by the CURRENT parameter
(so that the matching word has to be after the cursor). In
this case, the words starting with the one matching
end−pat are also removed from the words
array. If words contains no word matching
end−pat, the testing and modification is
performed as if it were not given.
|
−q |
|
The word currently being completed is split on spaces
into separate words, respecting the usual shell quoting
conventions. The resulting words are stored in the
words array, and CURRENT, PREFIX,
SUFFIX, QIPREFIX, and QISUFFIX are
modified to reflect the word part that is completed. |
In all the
above cases the return value is zero if the test succeeded
and the parameters were modified and non−zero
otherwise. This allows one to use this builtin in tests such
as:
if compset
−P ’*\=’; then ...
This forces
anything up to and including the last equal sign to be
ignored by the completion code.
compcall [
−TD ]
This allows the use of
completions defined with the compctl builtin from
within completion widgets. The list of matches will be
generated as if one of the non−widget completion
function (complete−word, etc.) had been called,
except that only compctls given for specific commands
are used. To force the code to try completions defined with
the −T option of compctl and/or the
default completion (whether defined by compctl
−D or the builtin default) in the appropriate
places, the −T and/or −D flags can
be passed to compcall.
The return
value can be used to test if a matching compctl
definition was found. It is non−zero if a
compctl was found and zero otherwise.
Note that this
builtin is defined by the zsh/compctl module.
CONDITION CODES
The following
additional condition codes for use within the [[ ...
]] construct are available in completion widgets. These
work on the special parameters. All of these tests can also
be performed by the compset builtin, but in the case
of the condition codes the contents of the special
parameters are not modified.
−prefix [ number ] pattern
true if the test for the
−P option of compset would succeed.
−suffix [
number ] pattern
true if the test for the
−S option of compset would succeed.
−after
beg−pat
true if the test of the
−N option with only the beg−pat
given would succeed.
−between
beg−pat end−pat
true if the test for the
−N option with both patterns would succeed.
MATCHING CONTROL
It is possible
by use of the −M option of the compadd
builtin command to specify how the characters in the string
to be completed (referred to here as the command line) map
onto the characters in the list of matches produced by the
completion code (referred to here as the trial completions).
Note that this is not used if the command line contains a
glob pattern and the GLOB_COMPLETE option is set or
the pattern_match of the compstate special
association is set to a non−empty string.
The
match−spec given as the argument to the
−M option (see ’Builtin Commands’
above) consists of one or more matching descriptions
separated by whitespace. Each description consists of a
letter followed by a colon and then the patterns describing
which character sequences on the line match which character
sequences in the trial completion. Any sequence of
characters not handled in this fashion must match exactly,
as usual.
The forms of
match−spec understood are as follows. In each
case, the form with an uppercase initial character retains
the string already typed on the command line as the final
result of completion, while with a lowercase initial
character the string on the command line is changed into the
corresponding part of the trial completion.
m:lpat=tpat
M:lpat=tpat
Here, lpat is a pattern
that matches on the command line, corresponding to
tpat which matches in the trial completion.
l:lanchor|lpat=tpat
L:lanchor|lpat=tpat
l:lanchor||ranchor=tpat
L:lanchor||ranchor=tpat
b:lpat=tpat
B:lpat=tpat
These letters are for patterns
that are anchored by another pattern on the left side.
Matching for lpat and tpat is as for m
and M, but the pattern lpat matched on the
command line must be preceded by the pattern lanchor.
The lanchor can be blank to anchor the match to the
start of the command line string; otherwise the anchor can
occur anywhere, but must match in both the command line and
trial completion strings.
If no
lpat is given but a ranchor is, this matches
the gap between substrings matched by lanchor and
ranchor. Unlike lanchor, the ranchor
only needs to match the trial completion string.
The b
and B forms are similar to l and L with
an empty anchor, but need to match only the beginning of the
trial completion or the word on the command line,
respectively.
r:lpat|ranchor=tpat
R:lpat|ranchor=tpat
r:lanchor||ranchor=tpat
R:lanchor||ranchor=tpat
e:lpat=tpat
E:lpat=tpat
As l, L, b
and B, with the difference that the command line and
trial completion patterns are anchored on the right side.
Here an empty ranchor and the e and E
forms force the match to the end of the trial completion or
command line string.
Each
lpat, tpat or anchor is either an empty
string or consists of a sequence of literal characters
(which may be quoted with a backslash), question marks,
character classes, and correspondence classes; ordinary
shell patterns are not used. Literal characters match only
themselves, question marks match any character, and
character classes are formed as for globbing and match any
character in the given set.
Correspondence
classes are defined like character classes, but with two
differences: they are delimited by a pair of braces, and
negated classes are not allowed, so the characters !
and ^ have no special meaning directly after the
opening brace. They indicate that a range of characters on
the line match a range of characters in the trial
completion, but (unlike ordinary character classes) paired
according to the corresponding position in the sequence. For
example, to make any lowercase letter on the line match the
corresponding uppercase letter in the trial completion, you
can use ’m:{a−z}={A−Z}’. More
than one pair of classes can occur, in which case the first
class before the = corresponds to the first after it,
and so on. If one side has more such classes than the other
side, the superfluous classes behave like normal character
classes. In anchor patterns correspondence classes also
behave like normal character classes.
The pattern
tpat may also be one or two stars,
’*’ or ’**’. This
means that the pattern on the command line can match any
number of characters in the trial completion. In this case
the pattern must be anchored (on either side); in the case
of a single star, the anchor then determines how much
of the trial completion is to be included
−−− only the characters up to the next
appearance of the anchor will be matched. With two stars,
substrings matched by the anchor can be matched, too.
Examples:
The keys of the
options association defined by the parameter
module are the option names in all−lowercase form,
without underscores, and without the optional no at
the beginning even though the builtins setopt and
unsetopt understand option names with uppercase
letters, underscores, and the optional no. The
following alters the matching rules so that the prefix
no and any underscore are ignored when trying to
match the trial completions generated and uppercase letters
on the line match the corresponding lowercase letters in the
words:
compadd
−M ’L:|[nN][oO]= M:_=
M:{A−Z}={a−z}’ − \
${(k)options}
The first part
says that the pattern ’[nN][oO]’ at the
beginning (the empty anchor before the pipe symbol) of the
string on the line matches the empty string in the list of
words generated by completion, so it will be ignored if
present. The second part does the same for an underscore
anywhere in the command line string, and the third part uses
correspondence classes so that any uppercase letter on the
line matches the corresponding lowercase letter in the word.
The use of the uppercase forms of the specification
characters (L and M) guarantees that what has
already been typed on the command line (in particular the
prefix no) will not be deleted.
Note that the
use of L in the first part means that it matches only
when at the beginning of both the command line string and
the trial completion. I.e., the string
’_NO_f’ would not be completed to
’_NO_foo’, nor would
’NONO_f’ be completed to
’NONO_foo’ because of the leading
underscore or the second ’NO’ on the line
which makes the pattern fail even though they are otherwise
ignored. To fix this, one would use
’B:[nN][oO]=’ instead of the first part.
As described above, this matches at the beginning of the
trial completion, independent of other characters or
substrings at the beginning of the command line word which
are ignored by the same or other
match−specs.
The second
example makes completion case insensitive. This is just the
same as in the option example, except here we wish to retain
the characters in the list of completions:
compadd
−M ’m:{a−z}={A−Z}’ ...
This makes
lowercase letters match their uppercase counterparts. To
make uppercase letters match the lowercase forms as
well:
compadd
−M
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}’
...
A nice example
for the use of * patterns is partial word completion.
Sometimes you would like to make strings like
’c.s.u’ complete to strings like
’comp.source.unix’, i.e. the word on the
command line consists of multiple parts, separated by a dot
in this example, where each part should be completed
separately −−− note, however, that the
case where each part of the word, i.e.
’comp’, ’source’ and
’unix’ in this example, is to be
completed from separate sets of matches is a different
problem to be solved by the implementation of the completion
widget. The example can be handled by:
compadd
−M ’r:|.=* r:|=*’ \
− comp.sources.unix comp.sources.misc ...
The first
specification says that lpat is the empty string,
while anchor is a dot; tpat is *, so
this can match anything except for the
’.’ from the anchor in the trial
completion word. So in ’c.s.u’, the
matcher sees ’c’, followed by the empty
string, followed by the anchor ’.’, and
likewise for the second dot, and replaces the empty strings
before the anchors, giving
’c[omp].s[ources].u[nix]’,
where the last part of the completion is just as normal.
With the
pattern shown above, the string ’c.u’
could not be completed to
’comp.sources.unix’ because the single
star means that no dot (matched by the anchor) can be
skipped. By using two stars as in
’r:|.=**’, however,
’c.u’ could be completed to
’comp.sources.unix’. This also shows that
in some cases, especially if the anchor is a real pattern,
like a character class, the form with two stars may result
in more matches than one would like.
The second
specification is needed to make this work when the cursor is
in the middle of the string on the command line and the
option COMPLETE_IN_WORD is set. In this case the
completion code would normally try to match trial
completions that end with the string as typed so far, i.e.
it will only insert new characters at the cursor position
rather then at the end. However in our example we would like
the code to recognise matches which contain extra characters
after the string on the line (the ’nix’
in the example). Hence we say that the empty string at the
end of the string on the line matches any characters at the
end of the trial completion.
More generally,
the specification
compadd
−M ’r:|[.,_−]=* r:|=*’ ...
allows one to
complete words with abbreviations before any of the
characters in the square brackets. For example, to complete
veryverylongfile.c rather than
veryverylongheader.h with the above in effect, you
can just type very.c before attempting
completion.
The
specifications with both a left and a right anchor are
useful to complete partial words whose parts are not
separated by some special character. For example, in some
places strings have to be completed that are formed
’LikeThis’ (i.e. the separate parts are
determined by a leading uppercase letter) or maybe one has
to complete strings with trailing numbers. Here one could
use the simple form with only one anchor as in:
compadd
−M ’r:|[A−Z0−9]=* r:|=*’
LikeTHIS FooHoo 5foo123 5bar234
But with this,
the string ’H’ would neither complete to
’FooHoo’ nor to
’LikeTHIS’ because in each case there is
an uppercase letter before the ’H’ and
that is matched by the anchor. Likewise, a
’2’ would not be completed. In both cases
this could be changed by using
’r:|[A−Z0−9]=**’, but then
’H’ completes to both
’LikeTHIS’ and
’FooHoo’ and a ’2’
matches the other strings because characters can be inserted
before every uppercase letter and digit. To avoid this one
would use:
compadd
−M
’r:[^A−Z0−9]||[A−Z0−9]=**
r:|=*’ \
LikeTHIS FooHoo foo123 bar234
By using these
two anchors, a ’H’ matches only uppercase
’H’s that are immediately preceded by
something matching the left anchor
’[^A−Z0−9]’. The effect is,
of course, that ’H’ matches only the
string ’FooHoo’, a ’2’
matches only ’bar234’ and so on.
When using the
completion system (see zshcompsys(1)), users can
define match specifications that are to be used for specific
contexts by using the matcher and
matcher−list styles. The values for the latter
will be used everywhere.
COMPLETION WIDGET EXAMPLE
The first step
is to define the widget:
zle −C
complete complete−word complete−files
Then the widget
can be bound to a key using the bindkey builtin
command:
bindkey
’^X\t’ complete
After that the
shell function complete−files will be invoked
after typing control−X and TAB. The function should
then generate the matches, e.g.:
complete−files
() { compadd − * }
This function
will complete files in the current directory matching the
current word.
NAME
zshcompsys − zsh
completion system
DESCRIPTION
This describes
the shell code for the new completion system. It consists of
various shell functions; those beginning
’comp’ are to be called directly by the
user, while those beginning ’_’ are
called by the completion code. The shell functions of the
second set which implement completion behaviour and which
may be bound to keystrokes, are referred to as
’widgets’.
INITIALIZATION
If the system
was installed completely, it should be enough to call the
shell function compinit from your initialization
file; see the next section. However, the function
compinstall can be run by a user to configure various
aspects of the completion system.
Usually,
compinstall will insert code into .zshrc,
although if that is not writable it will save it in another
file and tell you that file’s location. Note that it
is up to you to make sure that the lines added to
.zshrc are actually run; you may, for example, need
to move them to an earlier place in the file if
.zshrc usually returns early. So long as you keep
them all together (including the comment lines at the start
and finish), you can rerun compinstall and it will
correctly locate and modify these lines. Note, however, that
any code you add to this section by hand is likely to be
lost if you rerun compinstall, although lines using
the command ’zstyle’ should be gracefully
handled.
The new code
will take effect next time you start the shell, or run
.zshrc by hand; there is also an option to make them
take effect immediately. However, if compinstall has
removed definitions, you will need to restart the shell to
see the changes.
To run
compinstall you will need to make sure it is in a
directory mentioned in your fpath parameter, which
should already be the case if zsh was properly configured as
long as your startup files do not remove the appropriate
directories from fpath. Then it must be autoloaded
(’autoload −U compinstall’ is
recommended). You can abort the installation any time you
are being prompted for information, and your .zshrc
will not be altered at all; changes only take place right at
the end, where you are specifically asked for
confirmation.
Use of
compinit
This section describes the use of compinit to
initialize completion for the current session when run
directly by the user; if you have run compinstall it
will be called automatically from your .zshrc.
To initialize
the system, the function compinit should be in a
directory mentioned in the fpath parameter, and
should be autoloaded (’autoload −U
compinit’ is recommended), and then run simply as
’compinit’. This will define a few
utility functions, arrange for all the necessary shell
functions to be autoloaded, and will then re−define
all widgets that do completion to use the new system. If you
use the menu−select widget, which is part of
the zsh/complist module, you should make sure that
that module is loaded before the call to compinit so
that that widget is also re−defined. If completion
styles (see below) are set up to perform expansion as well
as completion by default, and the TAB key is bound to
expand−or−complete, compinit will
rebind it to complete−word; this is necessary
to use the correct form of expansion.
Should you need
to use the original completion commands, you can still bind
keys to the old widgets by putting a ’.’
in front of the widget name, e.g.
’.expand−or−complete’.
To speed up the
running of compinit, it can be made to produce a
dumped configuration which will be read in on future
invocations; this is the default, although it can be turned
off by calling compinit with the option
−D. The dumped file is .zcompdump in the
same directory as the startup files (i.e. $ZDOTDIR or
$HOME); alternatively, an explicit file name can be
given by ’compinit −d
dumpfile’. On the next call to compinit,
it will read the dumped file instead of performing a full
initialization.
If the number
of completion files changes, compinit will recognise
this and produce a new dump file. However, if the name of a
function or the arguments in the first line of a
#compdef function (as described below) change, it is
easiest to delete the dump file by hand so that
compinit will re−create it the next time it is
run. The check performed to see if there are new functions
can be omitted by giving the option −C. In this
case the dump file will only be created if there isn’t
one already.
The dumping is
actually done by another function, compdump, but you
will only need to run this yourself if you change the
configuration (e.g. using compdef) and then want to
dump the new one. The name of the old dumped file will be
remembered for this purpose.
If the
parameter _compdir is set, compinit uses it as
a directory where completion functions can be found; this is
only necessary if they are not already in the function
search path.
For security
reasons compinit also checks if the completion system
would use files not owned by root or by the current user, or
files in directories that are world− or
group−writable or that are not owned by root or by the
current user. If such files or directories are found,
compinit will ask if the completion system should
really be used. To avoid these tests and make all files
found be used without asking, use the option
−u, and to make compinit silently ignore
all insecure files and directories use the option
−i. This security check is skipped entirely
when the −C option is given.
The security
check can be retried at any time by running the function
compaudit. This is the same check used by
compinit, but when it is executed directly any
changes to fpath are made local to the function so
they do not persist. The directories to be checked may be
passed as arguments; if none are given, compaudit
uses fpath and _compdir to find completion
system directories, adding missing ones to fpath as
necessary. To force a check of exactly the directories
currently named in fpath, set _compdir to an
empty string before calling compaudit or
compinit.
Autoloaded
files
The convention for autoloaded functions used in completion
is that they start with an underscore; as already mentioned,
the fpath/FPATH parameter must contain the directory
in which they are stored. If zsh was properly
installed on your system, then fpath/FPATH
automatically contains the required directories for the
standard functions.
For incomplete
installations, if compinit does not find enough files
beginning with an underscore (fewer than twenty) in the
search path, it will try to find more by adding the
directory _compdir to the search path. If that
directory has a subdirectory named Base, all
subdirectories will be added to the path. Furthermore, if
the subdirectory Base has a subdirectory named
Core, compinit will add all subdirectories of
the subdirectories is to the path: this allows the functions
to be in the same format as in the zsh source
distribution.
When
compinit is run, it searches all such files
accessible via fpath/FPATH and reads the first line
of each of them. This line should contain one of the tags
described below. Files whose first line does not start with
one of these tags are not considered to be part of the
completion system and will not be treated specially.
The tags are:
#compdef names...
The file will be made
autoloadable and the function defined in it will be called
when completing names, each of which is either the
name of a command whose arguments are to be completed or one
of a number of special contexts in the form
−context− described below
for the _complete function.
Each
name may also be of the form
’cmd=service’. This is used
by functions that offer multiple services, i.e. different
completion behaviour for multiple commands. Such a string
makes the completion system call the function when
completing arguments for the command
’cmd’, setting the parameter
$service to the string ’service’.
The function can then use that parameter to decide what to
complete.
#compdef −p
pattern
The file will be made
autoloadable and the function defined in it will be called
when completing for a command whose name matches the given
pattern (a standard globbing pattern). Note that only
one pattern may be given.
#compdef −P
pattern
Like the previous one, but the
function will be called only if no completion function for
the command on the line could be found.
#compdef −k
style key−sequences...
This can be used to bind
special completion functions to the
key−sequences specified. It creates a widget
behaving like the builtin widget style, which must be
one of those that perform completion, namely
complete−word,
delete−char−or−list,
expand−or−complete,
expand−or−complete−prefix,
list−choices, menu−complete,
menu−expand−or−complete, or
reverse−menu−complete. If the
zsh/complist module is loaded (see
zshmodules(1)), the same happens to the
menu−select widget.
The widget is
then bound to all the key−sequences given, if
any: when one of the key−sequences is typed,
the function in the file will be invoked to generate the
matches. Note that a key will not be re−bound if if it
already was (that is, was bound to something other than
undefined−key). The widget created has the same
name as the file and can be bound to any other keys using
bindkey as usual.
#compdef −K
widget−name style key−sequences ...
This is similar to
−k, with the same style and
key−sequences arguments, preceded by a string
giving the name of a widget. In this case only one
key−sequences argument may be given, but the
entire set of three arguments may be repeated with a
different set of arguments. In particular, the
widget−name must be distinct in each set. It
should begin with ’_’, else one will be
added, and should not clash with the name of any existing
widget: names based on the name of the function are most
useful. For example,
#compdef
−K _foo_complete complete−word "^X^C"
\
_foo_list list−choices "^X^D"
(all on one
line) defines a widget _foo_complete for completion,
bound to ’^X^C’, and a widget
_foo_list for listing, bound to
’^X^D’.
#autoload [
options ]
This is used for files defining
utility functions that are not to be called directly as
completion functions but should be loaded automatically when
invoked. Typically they are to be called from within one of
the completion functions.
The
options will be given to the autoload builtin
command when making the function autoloaded. Most often,
this will be +X to force the function to be loaded
immediately. Note that the −U flag is always
implicitly added.
The # is
part of the tag name and no white space is allowed after it.
The #compdef tags use the compdef function
described below; the main difference is that the name of the
function is supplied implicitly.
Note also that
the functions for the completion system assume that the
KSH_AUTOLOAD option is not set and cannot be loaded
when it is set. To avoid having to unset
KSH_AUTOLOAD, you can instead use one or more
zwc file(s) which have been created with the command
zcompile −z to load the functions for the
completion system; see zshbuiltins(1). This forces
the functions to be autoloaded the way zsh normally loads
functions.
Functions
The compinit file defines the following function,
which may also be called directly by the user.
compdef [ −an ] function names...
compdef −d names...
compdef −p [ −a ] function
pattern
compdef −P [ −a ] function
pattern
compdef −k [ −an ] function style
key−sequences...
compdef −K [ −an ] function name
style key−sequences ...
The first form tells the
completion system to call the given function when
completing for the contexts or commands whose names
are given: this is like the #compdef tag unless the
first word contains an equal sign. In this case all words
have to be of the form
’cmd=service’ where
service is the name of a command or of a service
defined by an autoloaded function with the #compdef
tag and an argument of the form
’cmd=service’. This kind of
use makes the arguments of the cmds be completed as
those for the services.
If the
−n option is given, any existing completion
behaviour for particular contexts or commands will not be
altered. These definitions can be deleted by giving the
−d option as in the second form.
The form with
−p is similar to the first, but function
will be called for all commands whose name matches the
pattern; this is like the #compdef −p
function tag.
The form with
−P is like the third, but the function
will be called only if no function for the command itself
was found or if one was found and it set the
_compskip parameter to a value not containing
the substring patterns.
The form with
−k defines a widget with the same name as the
function which will be called for each of the
key−sequences; this is like the #compdef
−k tag. The function should generate the
completions needed and will otherwise behave like the
builtin widget whose name is given as the style
argument. The widgets usable for this are:
complete−word,
delete−char−or−list,
expand−or−complete,
expand−or−complete−prefix,
list−choices, menu−complete,
menu−expand−or−complete, and
reverse−menu−complete, as well as
menu−select if the zsh/complist module
is loaded. The option −n prevents the key being
bound if it is already to bound to something other than
undefined−key.
The form with
−K is similar and defines multiple widgets
based on the same function, each of which requires
the set of three arguments name, style and
key−sequences, where the latter two are as for
−k and the first must be a unique widget name
beginning with an underscore.
In each of the
forms supporting it the −a option makes the
function autoloadable (exactly equivalent to
autoload −U function).
The
compdef function is the place to turn to when one
wants to define what the completion system should complete
for a certain command. The function named can of course be
one of the functions supplied or one written by the user.
For example, if one has a command foo that gets
process identifiers as arguments, one could do:
compdef
_pids foo
using the
_pids function from the distribution to generate the
process identifiers. Not also the _gnu_generic
function described below, which can be used to complete
options for commands that understand the
’−−help’ option.
COMPLETION SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This section
gives a short overview of how the completion system works,
and then more detail on how users can configure how and when
matches are generated.
Overview
When completion is attempted somewhere on a command line the
completion system first tries to find out the context where
completion was tried. The context depends on such things as
the name of the command when completing an argument, and
possibly also the name of an option when completing an
argument to that option.
The
’context’ of a completion is a string consisting
of multiple fields. This is used to look up styles that can
be used to configure the completion system. Since it is not
possible to build the whole context string in advance,
completion functions may modify some of the fields and hence
the context used for lookup may vary during the same call to
the completion system.
The context
string always consists of the following fields, separated by
colons and with a leading colon before the first:
|
• |
|
The literal string completion, saying that this
style is used by the completion system. |
|
• |
|
The function; in many cases this field will be
blank, but when the completion system is called from other
functions, like predict−on or one of the
functions in the Command directory of the
distribution, this field contains the name of that function,
often in an abbreviated form. |
|
• |
|
The completer currently active, which is the name
of the function without the leading underscore. A
’completer’ is in overall control of how
completion is to be performed; ’complete’
is the basic one for ordinary completion, but completers may
perform various related tasks such as correction, or modify
the behaviour of a later completer (see the section
’Control Functions’ below for more
information). |
|
• |
|
The context or command. This is either one
of the special context names such as
−condition− as explained for the
_complete completer below, or the name of the command
we are completing arguments for. Completion functions for
commands that have sub−commands usually modify this
field to contain the name of the command followed by a minus
sign and the sub−command (e.g. the completion function
for the cvs command sets this field to strings such
as cvs−add when completing for the add
sub−command). |
|
• |
|
The argument, describing which argument we are
completing. Normally this is either a string of the form
argument−n, where n is the number
of the argument or it is a string of the form
option−opt−n when
completing the n’th argument of the option
opt. |
|
• |
|
The tag. Tags are used to discriminate between
the types of matches a completion function can generate in a
certain context. |
As an example,
the context name
:completion::complete:dvips:option−o−1:files
says that
normal completion was attempted on an argument of the
dvips command (more precisely: completion was
attempted on the first argument after the −o
option) and the completion function will generate filenames
for this context.
In many of the
possible contexts the completion system can generate
matches, often multiple types of matches. These types are
represented as simple names called ’tags’. The
completion system will decide internally what sort of tags
are allowed; a list of the standard possibilities is given
below. To determine in which order the tags are to be used
by the completion function, the
’tag−order’ style for the
appropriate context may be set, as described in the list of
standard styles below. Only those types of matches whose
tags were selected by this style will be produced, and in
the order given, although the default is to try all relevant
tags in an order determined by the particular completion in
use.
The
_complete_help bindable command described in the
section ’Bindable Commands’ below can be invoked
to find out the context and tag names and styles used at a
particular point in completion. It shows the list of
contexts and tags that would be used in if completion were
tried at the current cursor position. Hence one can easily
find out all the information needed to change the behaviour
of the tag−order style for a particular
context.
Completion
behaviour can be modified by various other styles defined
with the zstyle builtin command (see
zshmodules(1)). When looking up styles the completion
system uses full context names, including the tag.
Styles
determine such things as how the matches are generated; some
of them correspond to shell options (for example, the use of
menu completion), but styles provide more specific control.
They can have any number of strings as their value. Looking
up the value of a style therefore consists of two things:
the context, which may be matched as a pattern, and the name
of the style itself, which must be given exactly.
For example,
many completion functions can generate matches in a simple
and a verbose form and use the verbose style to
decide which form should be used. To make all such functions
use the verbose form, put
zstyle
’:completion:*’ verbose yes
in one of the
startup files like .zshrc; this sort of style can
also be configured with the compinstall function.
This definition simply means that the verbose style
has yes as its value in every context inside the
completion system. If the context pattern were
’*’, the verbose style would have this
value anywhere the style mechanism is used, not just in
completion.
As a more
specific example, the completion function for the
kill builtin command uses the verbose style to
decide if jobs and processes are listed only as job numbers
and process identifiers or if they are listed with the full
job texts and the command lines of the processes (the latter
is achieved by calling the ps command). To make this
builtin list the matches only as numbers one could call:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:kill:*’ verbose no
Furthermore, if
one wanted to see the command lines for processes but not
the job texts one could use the fact that the context name
contains the tag name when styles are looked up. As the
function for the kill builtin command uses the tags
jobs and processes, we can use:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:kill:*:jobs’ verbose no
To have more
control over when certain values for styles are used one can
use the special parameters available in completion widgets
(see see zshcompwid(1))) and the −e
option to zstyle that makes the value be evaluated
when looked up. For example, to make the completer
style have a different value when completing for the
cvs command, one could use the words special
array:
zstyle
−e ’:completion:*’ completer ’
if [[ $words[1] = cvs ]]; then
reply=(_complete)
else
reply=(_complete _approximate)
fi’
One should be
careful not to use too complicated code with this option, at
least for the styles that are looked up quite often. These
are basically those that define some global completion
behaviour but allow that to be different for all matches or
groups of matches (such as the menu and
list−rows−first styles). Alternatively
one can always use a less general pattern for the context
than in the example above and use a second call to
zstyle with a generic pattern and without using the
−e option to define the default behaviour.
Note that the
order in which styles are defined does not matter;
the style mechanism uses the most specific possible match
for a particular style to determine the set of values. More
precisely, strings are preferred over patterns (for example,
’:completion::complete:foo’ is more
specific than ’:completion::complete:*’),
and longer patterns are preferred over shorter patterns.
As with tags,
completion functions can use any style they choose, so there
can’t be a complete list. However, the following two
sections list those tags and styles that are used in many
places of the completion system.
Standard
Tags
Here are the tags currently used by the completion system.
Some of them are only used when looking up styles and do not
refer to a particular type of match.
accounts
used to look up the
users−hosts style
all−expansions
used by the _expand
completer when adding the single string containing all
possible expansions
all−files
for the names of all files (as
distinct from a particular subset, see the
globbed−files tag).
arguments
when an argument of a command
may be completed
|
arrays |
|
for names of array parameters |
|
association−keys
for keys of associative arrays;
used when completing inside a subscript of a parameter of
this type
bookmarks
when completing bookmarks (e.g.
for URLs and the zftp function suite)
builtins
for names of builtin
commands
characters
used for commands like
stty when completing characters; also used when
completing character classes after an opening bracket
colormapids
for X colormap ids
commands
for names of external commands
and names of sub−commands (used by some commands like
cvs)
contexts
for contexts used by the zstyle
builtin command
corrections
used by the _approximate
and _correct completers for the possible
corrections
cursors
for cursor names used by X
programs
default
used to look up default values
for various styles that may also be set for tags that are
used when generating matches; note that this tag is used
when only the function field of the context name is
set up
descriptions
used when looking up the value
of the format style for descriptions
devices
for names of device special
files
directories
for names of directories
directory−stack
for entries in the directory
stack
displays
for X display names
domains
for network domains
expansions
used by the _expand
completer for individual possibilities resulting from
expansion of a word
extensions
for X server extensions
file−descriptors
for the numbers of open file
descriptors
|
files |
|
the generic file−matching tag used by completion
functions that can complete the names of some kind of
file |
|
fonts |
|
used for X font names |
functions
names of functions, normally
shell functions although certain commands may understand
other kinds of function
globbed−files
for names of files matching the
glob pattern used by completion functions that expect a
certain type of file
|
groups |
|
used when completing names of user groups |
|
history−words
for words from the history
indexes
used for array indexes
keymaps
for names of zsh keymaps
keysyms
for names of X keysyms
libraries
for names of system
libraries
local−directories
for names of directories which
are subdirectories of the current working directory when
completing for the cd and related builtin
commands
manuals
for names of manual pages
|
maps |
|
for map names (e.g. NIS maps) |
|
messages
used to look up the
format style for messages
modifiers
for names of X modifiers
modules
for modules (e.g. zsh
modules)
my−accounts
used to look up the
users−hosts style
named−directories
for named directories (you
wouldn’t have guessed that, would you?)
|
names |
|
for all kinds of names |
|
nicknames
for nicknames of NIS maps
options
for command options
original
used by the
_approximate, _correct and _expand
completers when adding the original string
other−accounts
used to look up the
users−hosts style
packages
for packages (e.g. rpm
or installed Debian packages)
parameters
for names of parameters
path−directories
for names of directories found
by searching the cdpath array when completing for the
cd and related builtin commands
|
paths |
|
used to look up the values of the expand,
ambiguous and special−dirs styles |
|
pods |
|
for perl pods (documentation files) |
|
ports |
|
for communication ports |
prefixes
for prefixes (like those of a
URL)
printers
for printer names
processes
for process identifiers
processes−names
used to look up the
command style when generating the names of processes
for killall
sequences
for sequences (e.g. mh
sequences)
sessions
for sessions in the zftp
function suite
signals
for signal names
strings
for strings (e.g. the
replacement strings for the cd builtin command)
|
styles |
|
for styles used by the zstyle builtin command |
|
|
tags |
|
for tags (e.g. rpm tags) |
|
targets
for makefile targets
|
types |
|
for types of whatever (e.g. address types for the
xhost command) |
|
urls |
|
used to look up the urls and local styles
when completing URLs |
|
users |
|
for usernames |
|
values |
|
when completing a value out of a set of values (or a
list of such values) |
version
used by _call_program to
look up the command to run to determine the installed
version of various other commands (such as diff and
make).
warnings
used to look up the
format style for warnings
widgets
for zsh widget names
windows
for IDs of X windows
zsh−options
for shell options
Standard
Styles
Here are the names of the styles used by the completion
system. Note that the values of several of these styles
represent boolean values; here, any of the strings
’true’, ’on’,
’yes’, and ’1’ can be
used for the truth value ’true’ and the strings
’false’, ’off’,
’no’, and ’0’ are
interpreted as ’false’. The behavior for any
other value is undefined unless the description for the
particular style mentions other possible values; in
particular, the default value may be either on or off if the
style is not set.
Some of these
styles are tested for every tag used to add possible matches
and for the default tag (most notably menu,
list−colors and the styles controlling the
completion listing like list−packed and
last−prompt). When tested for the
default tag, only the function field of the
context will be set up, so the default value will normally
be set like:
zstyle
’:completion:*:default’ menu ...
accept−exact
This is tested for the default
tag and the tags used when generating matches. If it is set
to ’true’ for at least one match which is the
same as the string on the line, this match will immediately
be accepted.
When completing
pathnames (where it is looked up for the paths tag),
this style also accepts any number of patterns as the value.
If this is used, pathnames matching one of these patterns
will be accepted immediately even if the command line
contains some more partially typed pathname components and
these match no file under the directory accepted.
Note that this
is also used by the _expand completer to decide if
words beginning with a tilde or parameter expansion should
be expanded. This means that if, for example, there are
parameters foo and foobar, the string
’$foo’ will only be expanded if
accept−exact is set to ’true’.
add−space
This style is used by the
_expand completer. If it is ’true’ (the
default), a space will be inserted after all words resulting
from the expansion (except for directory names which get a
slash). The value may also be the string
’file’ to make the completer add a space
only to names of existing files. Finally, the
’true’ values and ’file’ may
be combined with ’subst’ to keep the
completer from adding a space when the resulting words were
generated by expanding a substitution of the form
’$(...)’ or
’${...}’.
It is also used
by the _prefix completer as a simple boolean value to
decide if a space should be inserted before the suffix.
ambiguous
This applies when completing
non−final components of filename paths. If it is set,
the cursor is left after the first ambiguous component, even
if menu completion is in use. It is tested with the
paths tag.
assign−list
When completing after an equals
sign, the completion system normally completes only one
filename. In some cases, particularly for certain parameters
such as PATH, a list of filenames separated by colons
is required. This style can be set to a list of patterns
matching the names of such parameters.
The default is
to complete lists when the word on the line already contains
a colon.
auto−description
If set, this style’s
value will be used as the description for options which are
not described by the completion functions, but that have
exactly one argument. The sequence ’%d’
in the value will be replaced by the description for this
argument. Depending on personal preferences, it may be
useful to set this style to something like
’specify: %d’. Note that this may not
work for some commands.
avoid−completer
This is used by the
_all_matches completer to decide if the string
consisting of all matches should be added to the list
currently being generated. Its value is a list of names of
completers. If any of these is the name of the completer
that generated the matches in this completion, the string
will not be added.
The default
value for this style is ’_expand _old_list _correct
_approximate’, i.e. it contains the completers for
which a string with all matches will almost never be
wanted.
cache−path
This style defines the path
where any cache files containing dumped completion data are
stored. Defaults to
’$ZDOTDIR/.zcompcache’, or
’$HOME/.zcompcache’ if $ZDOTDIR is
not defined. The completion layer will not be used unless
the use−cache style is set.
call−command
Currently this is only used by
the function completing make targets. If it is set to
’true’ and the installed version of the
make command allows it, make is called in a
way to generate all possible targets. The default value of
this style is ’false’ because calling
make can potentially take a very long time and in
some cases may even cause actions from the makefile be
executed despite the options given to make.
command
In many places, completion
functions need to call external commands to generate the
list of completions. This style can be used to override the
command which is called in some such cases. The elements of
the value are joined with spaces to form a command line to
execute. The value can also start with a hyphen, in which
case the usual command will be added to the end; this is
most useful for putting ’builtin’ or
’command’ in front to make sure the
appropriate version of a command is called, for example to
avoid calling a shell function with the same name as an
external command.
As an example,
the function generating process IDs as matches uses this
style with the processes tag to generate the IDs to
complete and the list of processes to display (if the
verbose style is ’true’). The list
produced by the command should look like the output of the
ps command. The first line is not displayed, but is
searched for the string ’PID’ (or
’pid’) to find the position of the
process IDs in the following lines. If the line does not
contain ’PID’, the first numbers in each
of the other lines are taken as the process IDs to
complete.
Note that the
completion function generally has to call the command every
time it is called. Because of that care should be taken to
specify only commands that take a short time to run (and
that will eventually stop at all).
commands
This is used by the function
completing sub−commands for the system initialisation
scripts (residing in /etc/init.d or somewhere not too
far away from that). It’s values give the default
commands to complete for those commands for which the
completion function isn’t able to find them out
automatically. The default for this style are the two
strings ’start’ and
’stop’.
complete
This is used by the
_expand_alias function when invoked as a bindable
command. If it set to ’true’ and the word on the
command line is not the name of an alias, matching alias
names will be completed.
completer
The strings given as the value
of this style provide the names of the completer functions
to use. The available completer functions are described in
the section ’Control Functions’ below.
Each string may
be the name of a completer function or a string of the form
’function:name’. In the
first case the completer field of the context will
contain the name of the completer without the leading
underscore and with all other underscores replaced by
hyphens. In the second case the function is the name
of the completer to call, but the context will contain the
name in the completer field of the context. If
the name starts with a hyphen, the string for the
context will be build from the name of the completer
function as in the first case with the name appended
to it. For example:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete
_complete:−foo
Here,
completion will call the _complete completer twice,
once using ’complete’ and once using
’complete−foo’ in the
completer field of the context. Normally, using the
same completer more than once makes only sense when used
with the ’functions:name’
form, because otherwise the context name will be the same in
all calls to the completer; possible exceptions to this rule
are the _ignored and _prefix completers.
The default
value for this style is _complete _ignored, i.e.
normally only completion will be done, first using the
ignored−patterns style and the $fignore
array and then without ignoring matches.
condition
This style is used by the
_list completer function to decide if insertion of
matches should be delayed unconditionally. The default is
’true’.
disabled
If this is set to
’true’, the _expand_alias completer and
bindable command will try to expand disabled aliases, too.
The default is ’false’.
disable−stat
This is used with an empty tag
by the function completing for the cvs command to
decide if the zsh/stat module should be used to
generate names of modified files in the appropriate places
(this is its only use). If set, completion will use the
ls command.
domains
If set, gives the names of
network domains that should be completed. If this is not set
by the user domain names will be taken from the file
/etc/resolv.conf.
|
expand |
|
This style is used when completing strings consisting of
multiple parts, such as path names. If one of its values is
the string ’prefix’, the partially typed
word from the line will be expanded as far as possible even
if trailing parts cannot be completed. If one of its values
is the string ’suffix’, matching names
for components after the first ambiguous one will also be
added. This means that the resulting string is the longest
unambiguous string possible, but if menu completion is
started on the list of matches generated this way, this will
also cycle through the names of the files in pathname
components after the first ambiguous one. |
fake−files
This style is used when
completing files and looked up without a tag. Its values are
of the form ’dir:names...’.
This will add the names (strings separated by spaces)
as possible matches when completing in the directory
dir, even if no such files really exist.
This can be
useful on systems that support special filesystems whose
top−level pathnames can not be listed or generated
with glob patterns. It can also be used for directories for
which one does not have read permission.
fake−parameters
This is used by the completion
function generating parameter names as matches. Its values
are names of parameters which might not yet be set, but
which should be completed nonetheless. Each name may also be
followed by a colon and a string specifying the type of the
parameter (like ’scalar’,
’array’ or ’integer’).
If such a type is given, the name will only be completed if
parameters of that type are requested in the particular
context. Names for which no type is specified will always be
completed.
file−patterns
In most places where filenames
are completed, the function _files is used which can
be configured with this style. If the style is unset,
_files offers, one after another, up to three tags:
’globbed−files’,
’directories’ and
’all−files’, depending on the types
of files expected by the caller of _files.
If the
file−patterns style is set, the default tags
are not used. Instead, the value of the style says which
tags and which patterns are to be offered. The strings in
the value contain specifications of the form
’pattern:tag’; each string
may contain any number of such specifications. The
pattern gives a glob pattern that is to be used to
generate filenames. If it contains the sequence
’%p’, that is replaced by the pattern(s)
given by the calling function. Colons in the pattern must be
preceded by a backslash to make them distinguishable from
the colon before the tag. If more than one pattern is
needed, the patterns can be given inside braces, separated
by commas. The tags of all strings in the value will
be offered by _files (again, one after another) and
used when looking up other styles. For strings containing
more than one specification, the filenames for all
specifications will be generated at the same try. If no
’:tag’ is given the
’files’ tag will be used. The tag
may also be followed by an optional second colon and a
description. If that is given, this description will be used
for the ’%d’ in the value of the
format style (if that is set) instead of the default
description supplied by the completion function. If the
description given here contains itself a
’%d’, that is replaced with the
description supplied by the completion function.
For example, to
make the rm command first complete only names of
object files and the names of all files if no object file
matches the string on the line, one would do:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:rm:*’ file−patterns \
’*.o:object−files’
’%p:all−files’
Another
interesting example is to change the default behaviour that
makes completion first offer files matching the patterns
given by the calling function, then directories and then all
files. Many people prefer to get both the files matching the
given patterns and the directories in the first try and all
files at the second try. To achieve this, one could do:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ file−patterns \
’%p:globbed−files *(−/):directories’
’*:all−files’
This works even
for contexts in which all files would be completed, because
_files will not try a pattern more than once and it
stops when the pattern ’*’ was tried.
Note also that
during the execution of completion functions, the
EXTENDED_GLOB option is in effect, so the characters
’#’, ’~’ and
’^’ have special meanings in the
patterns.
file−sort
The completion function that
generates filenames as possible matches uses this style
without a tag to determine in which order the names should
be listed and completed when using menu completion. The
value may be one of ’size’ to sort them
by the size of the file, ’links’ to sort
them by the number of links to the file,
’modification’ (or
’time’ or ’date’) to
sort them by the last modification time,
’access’ to sort them by the last access
time, or ’inode’ (or
’change’) to sort them by the last inode
change time. If the style is set to any other value, or is
unset, files will be sorted alphabetically by name. If the
value contains the string ’reverse’,
sorting is done in decreasing order.
force−list
This forces a list of
completions to be shown at any point where listing is done,
even in cases where the list would usually be suppressed.
For example, normally the list is only shown if there are at
least two different matches. By setting this style to
’always’, the list will always be shown,
even if there is only a single match which is immediately
accepted. The style may also be set to a number. In this
case the list will be shown if there are at least that many
matches, even if they would all insert the same string.
This style is
tested for the default tag and all tags used when generating
matches. This allows one to turn unconditional listing on
for certain types of matches.
|
format |
|
If this is set for the descriptions tag, its
value is used as a string to display above matches in
completion lists. The sequence ’%d’ in
this string will be replaced with a short description of
what these matches are. This string may also contain the
sequences to specify output attributes, such as
’%B’, ’%S’ and
’%{...%}’. |
For the same
purpose, this style is also tested with the tags used when
matches are generated before it is tested for the
descriptions tag. This provides the possibility of
defining different format strings for different types of
matches.
Note also that
some completer functions define additional
’%’−sequences. These are described
for the completer functions that make use of them.
For the
messages tag, this style defines a string used by
some completion functions to display messages. Here, the
’%d’ is replaced with a message given by
the completion function.
Finally, when
set with the warnings tag, the format string is
printed when no matches could be generated at all. In this
case the ’%d’ is replaced with the
descriptions for the matches that were expected separated by
spaces and the sequence ’%D’ is replaced
with those descriptions separated by newlines.
The
’%’ for the sequences that are replaced
by strings provided by the completion functions like the
’%d’ may be followed by field width
specifications as described for the zformat builtin
command from the zsh/zutil module, see
zshmodules(1).
|
glob |
|
This is used by the
_expand completer. If it is set to ’true’
(the default), globbing will be attempted on the words
resulting from substitution (see the substitute
style) or the original string from the line. |
|
global |
|
If this is set to ’true’ (the default), the
_expand_alias completer and bindable command will try
to expand global aliases. |
group−name
The completion system can put
different types of matches in different groups which are
then displayed separately in the list of possible
completions. This style can be used to give the names for
these groups for particular tags. For example, in command
position the completion system generates names of builtin
and external commands, names of aliases, shell functions and
parameters and reserved words as possible completions. To
have the external commands and shell functions listed
separately, one can set:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:−command−:*:commands’
group−name commands
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:−command−:*:functions’
group−name functions
This also means
that if the same name is used for different types of
matches, then those matches will be displayed together in
the same group.
If the name
given is the empty string, then the name of the tag for the
matches will be used as the name of the group. So, to have
all different types of matches displayed separately, one can
just set:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ group−name
’’
All matches for
which no group name is defined will be put in a group named
−default−.
group−order
This style is to be used
together with the group−name style. Once
different types of matches are put into different groups,
this style can be used to define in which order these groups
should appear when listing (compare tag−order,
which determines which completions appear at all). The
strings in the value are taken as group names and the named
groups will be shown in the order in which their names
appear in the value. All groups whose names are not given in
the value of this style will appear in the order defined by
the function generating the matches.
For example, to
have names of builtin commands, shell functions and external
commands appear in this order when completing in command
position one would set:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:−command−:*’
group−order \
builtins functions commands
|
groups |
|
A style holding the names of the groups that should be
completed. If this is not set by the user, the group names
from the YP database or the file
’/etc/group’ will be used. |
|
hidden |
|
If this is set to one of the ’true’ values,
the matches for the tags for which this is set will not
appear in the list; only the description for the matches as
set with the format style will be shown. If this is
set to ’all’, not even the description
will be displayed. |
Note that the
matches will still be completed; they are just not shown in
the list. To avoid having matches considered as possible
completions at all, the tag−order style can be
modified as described below.
|
hosts |
|
A style holding the names of
hosts that should be completed. If this is not set by the
user the hostnames in ’/etc/hosts’ will
be used. |
hosts−ports
This style is used by commands
that need or accept hostnames and ports. The strings in the
value should be of the form
’host:port’. These
hostnames and ports are completed depending on the
information already on the line, so that if, for example,
the hostname is already typed, only those ports specified
for that host will be completed. Multiple ports for the same
host may appear.
ignore−line
This style is tested for the
tags used when generating matches. If it is set to
’true’, then none of the words that are already
on the line will be considered possible completions. If it
is set to ’current’, the word the cursor
is on will not be considered a possible completion. The same
happens if the value is
’current−shown’, but only if the
list of completions is currently shown on the screen.
Finally, if it is set to ’other’ all
words except the current one will not be considered to be a
possible completion.
The values
’current’ and
’current−shown’ are a bit like the
opposite of accept−exact. They mean that only
strings with missing characters will be completed.
Note that you
almost certainly don’t want to set this to
’true’ or ’other’ for a
general context such as ’:completion:*’.
This is because it would disallow completion of, for
example, options multiple times even if the command in
question accepts the option more than once.
ignore−parents
The style is tested by the
function completing pathnames without a tag to determine
whether to ignore the names of directories already mentioned
in the current word, or the name of the current working
directory. The value must include one or both of the
following strings:
|
parent |
|
The name of any directory whose path is already
contained in the word on the line is ignored. For example,
when completing after foo/../, the directory
foo will not be considered a valid completion. |
|
pwd |
|
The name of the current working directory will not be
completed, so that, for example, completion after ../
will not use the name of the current directory. |
In addition,
the value may include one or both of:
|
.. |
|
Ignore the specified directories
only when the word on the line contains the substring
’../’. |
directory
Ignore only when names of
directories are completed, not when completing names of
files.
Note that names
of directories ignored because of one of the tests will be
ignored in the same way as the matches ignored because of
the ignored−patterns style. I.e., by using the
_ignored completer it is possible to complete these
directories nonetheless.
ignored−patterns
This style can be used to
specify a list of patterns which are tested against against
the trial completions in a given context; any matching
completions will be removed from the list of possibilities.
The _ignored completer can appear in the list of
completers to produce a list which includes these matches
once more. This is a more configurable version of the shell
parameter $fignore.
Note that
during the execution of completion functions, the
EXTENDED_GLOB option is in effect, so the characters
’#’, ’~’ and
’^’ have special meanings in the
patterns.
insert−ids
When completing process IDs,
for example as arguments to the kill and wait
builtins, completion allows the user to type the name of a
command, which will be converted to the appropriate process
ID. A problem arises when the process name typed is not
unique. By default (or if this style is set explicitly to
’menu’) the name will be converted
immediately to a set of possible IDs, and menu completion
will be started to cycle through them. If the value of the
style is ’single’, however, the shell
will wait until the user has typed enough to make the
command unique before converting the name to an ID; the user
must type any additional characters required. If the value
is any other string, menu completion will be started when
the string typed by the user is longer than the common
prefix of the corresponding IDs.
insert−tab
If this has one of the
’true’ values, the completion system will insert
a TAB character (assuming it was used to start completion)
instead of performing completion when there is no
non−blank character to the left of the cursor. If set
to ’false’, completion will be done even
there.
The value may
also contain the substrings ’pending’ or
’pending=val’ to make the
character typed to start completion be inserted instead of
completion being tried when there is input pending which has
not yet been processed by the shell. If a val is
given, completion will not be done if there are at least
that many characters of unprocessed input. This is often
useful to have set when pasting characters into a terminal.
Note however, that it relies on the $PENDING special
parameter from the zsh/zle module being set properly
which is not guaranteed on all platforms.
The default
value of this style is ’true’ unless when
completing inside the vared builtin command, where it
defaults to ’false’.
insert−unambiguous
This is used by the
_match and _approximate completer functions,
where the possible completions may not have a common prefix
so that menu completion is often the most useful may of
choosing completions. If the style is set to
’true’, the completer will start menu completion
only if no unambiguous string could be generated that is at
least as long as the original string typed by the user. Note
that the _approximate completer uses it after setting
the completer field in the context name to one of
correct−num or
approximate−num, where num is the
number of errors that were accepted.
When used for
the _match completer, the style may also be set to
the string ’pattern’. This makes the
pattern on the line be left unchanged if it didn’t
match unambiguously.
keep−prefix
This style is used by the
_expand completer. If it is ’true’, the
completer will try to keep a prefix containing a tilde or
parameter expansion. I.e., the string
’~/f*’ would be expanded to
’~/foo’ instead of
’/home/user/foo’. If the style is set to
’changed’ (the default), the prefix will
only be left unchanged if there were other changes between
the expanded words and the original word from the command
line. Any other value makes the prefix be expanded
unconditionally.
Note that with
one of the ’true’ values, the _expand
completer returns if there is only one expansion and that
is, after restoring the original prefix, the same as the
original word. This means that other completers will be
called immediately after _expand.
last−prompt
This is used to determine if
the completion code should try to put the cursor back onto
the previous command line after showing a completion listing
(as for the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT option). As with
several other styles, it is tested for the default
tag as well as all the possible tags when generating
matches. The cursor will be moved back to the previous line
if this style is ’true’ for all types of matches
added. Note also that this is independent of the numeric
argument, unlike the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT option.
|
list |
|
This style is used by the _history_complete_word
bindable command. If it is set to ’true’ it has
no effect, but if it is set to ’false’ the
matches will not be listed, overriding the setting of the
options that control listing behaviour, especially
AUTO_LIST. Use the context prefix
’:completion:history−words’. |
list−colors
If the zsh/complist
module is used, this style can be used to set color
specifications as with the ZLS_COLORS and
ZLS_COLOURS parameters, which will not be honored
under this completion system (see the section ’The
zsh/complist Module’ in zshmodules(1)).
If this style
is set for the default tag, the strings in the value
are taken as specifications that are to be used everywhere.
If it is set for other tags, the specifications are used
only for matches of the type described by the tag. For this
to work best, the group−name style must be set
to an empty string. If the group−name tag
specifies other names for the groups the matches in these
groups can be colored by using these names together with the
’(group)...’ syntax described for the
ZLS_COLORS and ZLS_COLOURS parameters and
adding the specifications to the value for this style with
the default tag (although in most cases it should
work by setting this style for the appropriate tags).
It is possible
to use the same specifications set up for the GNU version of
the ls command:
zstyle
’:completion:*:default’ list−colors
${(s.:.)LS_COLORS}
The default
colors are the same as for the GNU ls command and can
be obtained by setting the style to an empty string (i.e.
’’).
list−packed
Like the
list−colors style, this is tested with the
default tag and all tags used when generating
matches. If it is set to ’true’ for a tag, the
matches added for it will be listed as if the
LIST_PACKED option were set. If it is set to
’false’, they are listed normally.
list−prompt
If this style is set for the
default tag, completion lists that don’t fit on
the screen can be scrolled (see the description of the
zsh/complist module in zshmodules(1)). The
value, if not the empty string, will be displayed after
every screenful and the shell will prompt for a key press;
if the style is set to the empty string, a default prompt
will be used. The value may contain the escape sequences
’%l’ or ’%L’, which
will be replaced by the number of the last line displayed
and the total number of lines; ’%m’ or
’%M’, which will be replaced by the
number of the last match shown and the total number of
matches; and ’%p’ and
’%P’, which will be replaced by
’Top’ when at the beginning of the list,
’Bottom’ when at the end and the position
shown in percent of the total length otherwise. In each of
these cases the form with the uppercase letter is replaced
by a string of fixed width, padded to the right with spaces.
As in other prompt strings, the escape sequences
’%S’, ’%s’,
’%B’, ’%b’,
’%U’, ’%u’, and
’%{...%}’ for entering and leaving
the display modes standout, bold and underline are also
available.
list−rows−first
This style is tested in the
same way as the list−packed style and
determines if matches are to be listed in a rows−first
fashion, as for the LIST_ROWS_FIRST option.
list−suffixes
This style is used by the
function used to complete filenames. If completion is
attempted on a string containing multiple partially typed
pathname components and this style is set to
’true’, all components starting with the first
one for which more than one match could be generated will be
shown.
|
local |
|
This style is used by completion functions which
generate URLs as possible matches to add suitable matches
when a URL points to a local web server, that is, one whose
files are available directly on the local file system. Its
value should consist of three strings: a hostname, the path
to the default web pages for the server and the directory
name used by a user placing web pages within their home
area. For example, completion after
’http://toast/~yousir/’ will attempt to
match the name ’toast’ against the first
argument to the style, and if successful will look in the
directory under ~yousir given by the third argument
to the style for possible completions. |
match−original
This is used by the
_match completer. If it is set to only,
_match will try to generate matches without inserting
a ’*’ at the cursor position. If set to
any other non−empty value, it will first try to
generate matches without inserting the
’*’ and if that yields no matches, it
will try again with the ’*’ inserted. If
it is unset or set to the empty string, matching will only
be done with the ’*’ inserted.
matcher
This style is tested for tags
used when generating matches. Its value is used as an match
specification additional to any given by the
matcher−list style which should be in the form
described in the section ’Matching Control’ in
zshcompwid(1).
matcher−list
This style is used by the main
completion function to retrieve match specifications that
are to be used everywhere. Its value should be a list of
such specifications. The completion system will try them one
after another for each completer selected. For example, to
first try simple completion and, if that generates no
matches, case−insensitive completion one would do:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ matcher−list
’’
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}’
By default
every specification replaces previous ones. If specification
is prefixed with +, it is added to the existing list.
This allows testing more general patterns without repeating
the whole list every time, as in:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ matcher−list
’’ ’+m{a−Z}={A−Z}’
’+m{A−Z}={a−z}’
The style
allows even finer control by specifying a particular
completer, without the leading underscore, in the third
field of the completion context. For example, if one uses
the completers _complete and _prefix but wants
to try case−insensitive completion only when using the
_complete completer, one would do:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete _prefix
zstyle ’:completion:*:complete:*’
matcher−list \
’’
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}’
Note that the
completer style allows user−defined names to be
used in the context instead of the name of the completer.
This is useful if, for example, one wants to try normal
completion without a match specification and with
case−insensitive matching first, correction if that
doesn’t generate any matches and partial−word
completion if that doesn’t yield any matches either.
In this case one can give the _complete completer
more than once in the completer style and define
different match specifications for each occurrence, as
in:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete _correct
_complete:foo
zstyle ’:completion:*:complete:*’
matcher−list \
’’
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}’
zstyle ’:completion:*:foo:*’ matcher−list
\
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}
r:|[−_./]=* r:|=*’
If the style is
unset in any context no match specification is applied;
further, some completers such as _correct and
_approximate do not use the match specifications at
all. However, it is always safe to use the simple form for
this style (as in the first example above), since any
completers which do not use match specifications will only
ever be called once, rather than once per specification.
Since the
specification−strings in this style have to be tried
one after another, it is a good idea to keep their number
low. In most cases one to three strings (each of which may,
without to large a performance hit, consist of more than one
single match specification) will give acceptable
performance.
max−errors
This is used by the
_approximate and _correct completer functions
to determine the maximum number of errors to allow. The
completer will try to generate completions by first allowing
one error, then two errors, and so on, until either a match
or matches were found or the maximum number of errors given
by this style has been reached.
If the value
for this style contains the string
’numeric’, the completer function will
take any numeric argument as the maximum number of errors
allowed. For example, with
zstyle
’:completion:*:approximate:::’ max−errors
2 numeric
two errors are
allowed if no numeric argument is given, but with a numeric
argument of six (as in ’ESC−6
TAB’), up to six errors are accepted. Hence with a
value of ’0 numeric’, no correcting
completion will be attempted unless a numeric argument is
given.
If the value
contains the string ’not−numeric’,
the completer will not try to generate corrected
completions when given a numeric argument, so in this case
the number given should be greater than zero. For example,
’2 not−numeric’ specifies that
correcting completion with two errors will usually be
performed, but if a numeric argument is given, correcting
completion will not be performed.
The default
value for this style is ’2 numeric’.
|
menu |
|
If this is set to true in a given context, using any of
the tags defined for a given completion, menu completion
will be used. The tag ’default’ can be
used to set the default value, but a specific tag will take
precedence. If none of the values found in this way is true
but at least one is set to ’auto’ the
behaviour will be as for the AUTO_MENU option.
Finally, if one of the values is explicitly set to false,
menu completion will be turned off even if it would
otherwise be active (for example, with the
MENU_COMPLETE option). |
Using the form
’yes=num’, where
’yes’ may be any of the true values
(’yes’, ’true’,
’on’ and ’1’) turns on
menu completion if there at least num matches. Using
this for one of the ’false’ values (as in
’no=10’) makes menu completion not
be used if there are num or more matches. Of course,
this is only useful when menu completion is normally used,
e.g. by setting the MENU_COMPLETE option. The
’true’ values may also be used in the form
’yes=long’ to turn on menu completion if
the list does not fit onto the screen. This will start menu
completion only if normal completion was attempted, not when
only the list of possible completions was requested. To
start menu completion even then, the value
’yes=long−list’ can be used.
In addition to
(or instead of) the above possibilities, the value may
contain the string ’select’, optionally
followed by an equals sign and a number. In this case menu
selection (as defined by the zsh/complist module)
will be started. Without the optional number, it will be
started unconditionally and with a number it will be started
only if at least that many matches are generated; if the
values for more than one tag provide a number, the smallest
number is taken. Menu selection can be turned off explicitly
by defining a value containing the string
’no−select’.
It is also
possible to start menu selection only if the list of matches
does not fit on the screen by using the value
’select=long’. This will only start menu
selection if the widget invoked does completion, not simply
listing as done by
delete−char−or−list; to start menu
selection even here, use the value
’select=long−list’.
To turn on menu
completion or menu selection when a certain number of
matches is generated or the list of matches does not
fit onto the screen, both of ’yes=’ and
’select=’ can be given twice, once with a
number and once with ’long’ or
’long−list’.
numbers
This is used with the
jobs tag. If it is ’true’, the shell will
complete the job numbers instead of the shortest unambiguous
strings of the jobs’ command lines. If the value is a
number, job numbers will only be used if that many words
from the job descriptions are required to resolve
ambiguities. For example, if the value is
’1’, strings will only be used if all
jobs differ in the first word on their command lines.
old−list
This is used by the
_oldlist completer. If it is set to
’always’, then standard widgets which
perform listing will retain the current list of matches,
however they were generated; this can be turned off
explicitly with the value ’never’, giving
the behaviour without the _oldlist completer. If the
style is unset, or any other value, then the existing list
of completions is displayed if it is not already; otherwise,
the standard completion list is generated; this is the
default behaviour of _oldlist. However, if there is
an old list and this style contains the name of the
completer function that generated the list, then the old
list will be used even if it was generated by a widget which
does not do listing.
For example,
suppose you type ^Xc to use the _correct_word
widget, which generates a list of corrections for the word
under the cursor. Usually, typing ^D would generate a
standard list of completions for the word on the command
line, and show that. With _oldlist, it will instead
show the list of corrections already generated.
As another
example consider the _match completer: with the
insert−unambiguous style set to
’true’ it inserts only a common prefix string,
if there is any. However, this may remove parts of the
original pattern, so that further completion could produce
more matches than on the first attempt. By using the
_oldlist completer and setting this style to
_match, the list of matches generated on the first
attempt will be used again.
old−matches
This is used by the
_all_matches completer to decide if an old list of
matches should be used if one exists. It may be set to one
of the ’true’ values or to the string
’only’ to use such a list. If it is set
to ’only’, _all_matches will only
use an old list and won’t have any effect on the list
of matches currently being generated.
old−menu
This is used by the
_oldlist completer. It controls how menu completion
behaves when a completion has already been inserted and the
user types a standard completion key type such as
TAB. The default behaviour of _oldlist is that
menu completion always continues with the existing list of
completions. If this style is set to ’false’,
however, a new completion is started if the old list was
generated by a different completion command; this is the
behaviour without the _oldlist completer.
For example,
suppose you type ^Xc to generate a list of
corrections, and menu completion is started in one of the
usual ways. Usually, or with this style set to false,
typing TAB at this point would start trying to
complete the line as it now appears. With _oldlist,
it instead continues to cycle through the list of
corrections.
original
This is used by the
_approximate and _correct completers to decide
if the original string should be added as one possible
completion. Normally, this is done only if there are at
least two possible corrections, but if this style is set to
’true’, it is always added. Note that these
completers use this style after setting the completer field
in the context name to correct−num or
approximate−num, where num is the
number of errors that were accepted.
packageset
This style is used when
completing arguments of the Debian ’dpkg’
program. It contains an override for the default package set
for a given context. For example,
zstyle
’:completion:*:complete:dpkg:option−−status−1:*’
\
packageset avail
causes
available packages, rather than only installed packages, to
be completed for ’dpkg
−−status’.
|
path |
|
The function that completes color names uses this style
with the colors tag. The value should be the pathname
of a file containing color names in the format of an X11
rgb.txt file. If the style is not set but this file
is found in one of various standard locations it will be
used as the default. |
|
ports |
|
A style holding the service names of ports to complete.
If this is not set by the user, the service names from
’/etc/services’ will be used. |
prefix−hidden
This is used when matches with
a common prefix are added (e.g. option names). If it is
’true’, this prefix will not be shown in the
list of matches.
The default
value for this style is ’false’.
prefix−needed
This, too, is used for matches
with a common prefix. If it is set to ’true’
this common prefix has to be typed by the user to generate
the matches. E.g. for options this means that the
’−’, ’+’, or
’−−’ has to be on the line to
make option names be completed at all.
The default
value for this style is ’true’.
preserve−prefix
This style is used when
completing path names. Its value should be a pattern
matching an initial prefix of the word to complete that
should be left unchanged under all circumstances. For
example, on some Unices an initial ’//’
(double slash) has a special meaning and hence should be
kept. For that one could set this style to the string
’//’. As another example, setting this
style to ’?:/’ under Cygwin would allow
completion after ’a:/...’ and the
like.
|
range |
|
This is used by the _history completer and the
_history_complete_word bindable command to decide
which words should be completed. It may be set to a number,
N, to say that only the last N words from the
history should be completed. The value may also be of the
form ’max:slice’. This
means that first the last slice words will be
completed. If that yields no matches, the slice words
before those will be tried and so on, until either at least
one match is generated or max words have been tried.
The default is to complete all words from the history at
once. |
regular
This style is used by the
_expand_alias completer and bindable command. If set
to ’true’ (the default), regular aliases will be
expanded but only in command position. If it is set to
’false’, regular aliases will never be expanded
and if it is set to the string ’always’,
regular aliases will be expanded even if not in command
position.
remove−all−dups
The
_history_complete_word bindable command and the
_history completer use this to decide if all
duplicate matches should be removed, rather than just
consecutive duplicates.
select−prompt
If this is set for the
default tag, its value will be displayed during menu
selection (see the menu style above) when the
completion list does not fit on the screen as a whole. The
same escapes as for the list−prompt style are
understood, but give the number of the match or line the
mark is on. A default prompt is used when the value is the
empty string.
select−scroll
This style is tested for the
default tag and determines how a completion list is
scrolled during a menu selection (see the menu style
above) when the completion list does not fit on the screen
as a whole. Its value should be ’0’
(zero) to scroll by half−screenfuls, a positive
integer to scroll by that many lines and a negative number
to scroll by the number of lines of the screen minus that
number (or plus the number, since it is negative). The
default is to scroll by single lines.
separate−sections
This style is used with the
manuals tag when completing names of manual pages. If
it is ’true’, entries for different sections are
added separately using tag names of the form
’manual.X’, where X is the
section number. This means that it is possible to make pages
from different sections be listed separately by setting the
group−name style. The default for this style is
’false’.
single−ignored
This is used by the
_ignored completer. It specifies what should be done
if it can generate only one match, which is often a special
case. If its value is ’show’, the single
match will be displayed but not inserted. If the value is
’menu’, then the single match and the
original string are both added as matches and menu
completion is started so that one can easily select either
of them.
|
sort |
|
If set to ’true’, completion functions that
generate words from the history as possible matches sort
these words alphabetically instead of keeping them in the
order in which they appear in the history (from youngest to
oldest). |
This is also
used by the _expand completer. Here, if it is set to
’true’, the expansions generated will always be
sorted. If it is set to ’menu’, then the
expansions are only sorted when they are offered as single
strings (not in the string containing all possible
expansions).
special−dirs
Normally, the completion code
will not produce the directory names ’.’
and ’..’ as possible completions. If this
style is set to ’true’, it will add both
’.’ and ’..’ as
possible completions; if it is set to
’..’, only ’..’ will
be added.
squeeze−slashes
If set to ’true’,
sequences of slashes (as in ’foo//bar’)
will be treated as if they were only one slash when
completing pathnames. This is the usual behaviour of UNIX
paths. However, by default the file completion function
behaves as if there were a ’*’ between
the slashes.
|
stop |
|
If set to ’true’, the
_history_complete_word bindable command will stop
once when reaching the beginning or end of the history.
Invoking _history_complete_word will then wrap around
to the opposite end of the history. If this style is set to
’false’ (the default),
_history_complete_word will loop immediately as in a
menu completion. |
subst−globs−only
This is used by the
_expand completer. If it is set to
’true’, the expansion will only be used if it
resulted from globbing; hence, if expansions resulted from
the use of the substitute style described below, but
these were not further changed by globbing, the expansions
will be rejected.
The default for
this style is ’false’.
substitute
This boolean style controls
whether the _expand completer will first try to
expand all substitutions in the string (such as
’$(...)’ and
’${...}’).
The default is
’true’.
|
suffix |
|
This is used by the _expand completer if the word
starts with a tilde or contains a parameter expansion. If it
is set to ’true’, the word will only be expanded
if it doesn’t have a suffix, i.e. if it is something
like ’~foo’ or ’$foo’,
but not if it is ’~foo/’ or
’$foo/bar’, unless that suffix itself
contains characters eligible for expansion. The default for
this style is ’true’. |
tag−order
This provides a mechanism for
sorting how the tags available in a particular context will
be used.
The values for
the style are sets of space−separated lists of tags.
The tags in each value will be tried at the same time; if no
match is found, the next value is used. (See the
file−patterns style for an exception to this
behavior.)
For
example:
zstyle
’:completion:*:complete:−command−:*’
tag−order \
’commands functions’
specifies that
completion in command position should offer only completions
for external commands and shell functions immediately.
In addition to
tag names, each string in the value may take one of the
following forms:
|
− |
|
If any string in the value consists of only a hyphen,
then only the tags specified by the other strings in
the value are generated. Normally all tags not explicitly
selected are tried last if the specified tags fail to
generate any matches. This means that a value consisting
only of a single hyphen turns off completion. |
! tags...
A string starting with an
exclamation mark specifies names of tags that are not
to be used. The effect is the same as if all other possible
tags for the context had been listed.
tag:label
...
In strings not starting with an
exclamation mark, it is also possible to specify tag labels
instead of only tags, where tag is one of the tags
offered by the completion function for the current context
and label is a name. For this, the completion
function will generate matches in the same way as for the
tag but it will use the label in place of the
tag in the context names used to look up styles. If the
label starts with a hyphen, the tag is
prepended to the label to form the name used for
lookup. This can be used to make the completion system try a
certain tag more than once, supplying different style
settings for each attempt, see below for an example.
The
label may optionally be followed by a second colon
and a description. This description will then be used for
the ’%d’ in the value of the
format style instead of the default description
supplied by the completion function. Spaces in the
description have to be quoted by preceding them with a
backslash and a ’%d’ appearing in the
description is replaced with the description given by the
completion function.
In each of the
cases above, the tag may also be a pattern or more than one
pattern inside braces and separated by commas. In this case
all of the offered tags matching the pattern(s) will be used
except for those that are given explicitly in the same
string. There are probably two main uses of this. One is the
case where one wants to try one of the tags more than once,
setting other styles differently for each try, but still
wants to use all the other tags without having to repeat
them all. For example, to make completion of function names
in command position ignore all the completion functions
starting with an underscore the first time completion is
tried, one could do:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:−command−:*’
tag−order \
’functions:−non−comp *’ functions
zstyle
’:completion:*:functions−non−comp’
ignored−patterns ’_*’
Here, the
completion system will first try all tags offered, but will
use the tag label functions−non−comp when
looking up styles for the function names completed. For
this, the ignored−patterns style is set to
exclude functions starting with an underscore from the set
of possible matches. If none of the generated matches match
the string on the line, the completion system will use the
second value of the tag−order style and
complete functions names again, but this time using the name
functions to look up styles, so that the
ignored−patterns style is not used and all
function names are considered.
Of course, this
can also be used to split the matches for one tag into
different groups. For example:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ tag−order \
’options:−long:long\ options
options:−short:short\ options
options:−single−letter:single\ letter\
options’
zstyle
’:completion:*:options−long’
ignored−patterns
’[−+](|−|[^−]*)’
zstyle ’:completion:*:options−short’
ignored−patterns ’−−*’
’[−+]?’
zstyle
’:completion:*:options−single−letter’
ignored−patterns ’???*’
With the
group−names style set, this makes options
beginning with ’−−’, options
beginning with a single ’−’ or
’+’ but containing multiple characters,
and single−letter options be displayed in separate
groups with different descriptions.
The second
interesting use of patterns is the case where one wants to
try multiple match specifications one after another. The
matcher−list style offers something similar,
but it is tested very early in the completion system and
hence can’t be set for single commands nor for more
specific contexts. Here is how to try normal completion
without any match specification and, if that generates no
matches, try again with case−insensitive matching,
restricting the effect to arguments of the command
foo:
zstyle
’:completion:*:*:foo:*’ tag−order
’*’ ’*:−case’
zstyle ’:completion:*−case’ matcher
’m:{a−z}={A−Z}’
First, all the
tags offered when completing after foo are tried
using the normal tag name. If that generates no matches, the
second value of tag−order is used, which tries
all tags again except that this time each has
−case appended to its name for lookup of
styles. Hence this time the value for the matcher
style from the second call to zstyle in the example
is used to make completion case−insensitive.
Using the
−e option of the zstyle builtin command,
it is possible to specify conditions saying when certain
tags are to be used. For example:
zstyle
−e ’*:−command−:*’
tag−order ’
if [[ −n $PREFIX ]]; then
reply=( )
else
reply=( − )
fi’
Makes
completion in command position happen only if the string on
the line is not empty. This is tested using the
PREFIX parameter which is special in completion
widgets; see zshcompwid for a description of these special
parameters. Setting reply to an empty array ensures
that only the default behaviour of trying all tags at once
is used and setting it to an array containing only a hyphen
disables that default behaviour −− thus keeping
all tags from being tried.
If no style has
been defined for a context, the strings
’(|*−)argument−*
(|*−)option−* values’ and
’options’ plus all tags offered by the
completion function will be used to provide a sensible
default behavior that causes arguments (whether normal
command arguments or arguments of options) to be completed
before option names for most commands.
|
urls |
|
This is used together with the the urls tag by
completion functions that generate URLs as possible matches.
If the value consists of more than one string or if the only
string does not name a file or directory, the strings are
used as the URLs to complete. |
If the value
contains only one string and that is the name of a normal
file, the URLs are taken from that file (where the URLs may
be separated by white space or newlines).
Finally, if the
only string in the value names a directory, that should
contain sub−directories named after the retrieval
methods which occur as the first part of a URL, i.e.
’http’, ’ftp’,
’bookmark’, and so on. These
sub−directories should contain files and other
sub−directories whose pathnames are possible
completions after the initial ’http://’,
’ftp://’, etc. See the description in the
file _urls in the User sub−directory of
the completion system for more information.
use−cache
If this is set, the completion
caching layer is activated for any completions which use it
(via the _store_cache, _retrieve_cache, and
_cache_invalid functions). The directory containing
the cache files can be changed with the
cache−path style.
use−compctl
If this style is set to a
string not equal to false, 0,
no, and off, the completion system may use any
completion specifications defined with the compctl
builtin command. If the style is unset, this is done only if
the zsh/compctl module is loaded. The string may also
contain the substring ’first’ to make the
definition for ’compctl −T’ be
used, and the substring ’default’ to make
the one for ’compctl −D’ be
used.
Note that this
is only intended to smooth the transition from
compctl to the new completion system and may
disappear in the future.
Note also that
the definitions from compctl will only be used if
there is no specific completion function for the command in
question. For example, while completing arguments to the
command foo, if this was handled by a command
function _foo, compctl would never be tried,
while if it was handled by _default, compctl
would be tried.
|
users |
|
This may be set to a list of names that should be
completed whenever a username is needed. If it is not set or
the string on the line doesn’t match any of the
strings in this list, all usernames will be completed. |
users−hosts
The values of this style should
be of the form ’user@host’
or ’user:host’. It is used
for commands that need pairs of user− and hostnames.
For such commands, only the pairs from this style are used
and if, for example, the username is already typed, then
only the hostnames for which there is a pair with that
username is defined.
If set for the
my−accounts tag, this is used for commands such
as rlogin and ssh; in this case the style
should contain the names of the user’s own accounts on
remote hosts. If set for the other−accounts
tag, it is used for commands such as talk and
finger and should contain other people’s
accounts. Finally, it may also be used by some commands with
the accounts tag.
users−hosts−ports
Like users−hosts
but used for commands like telnet and containing
strings of the form
’user@host:port’.
verbose
This is used in several
contexts to decide if only a simple or a verbose list of
matches should be generated. For example some commands show
descriptions for option names if this style is
’true’.
The default
value for this style is ’true’.
|
word |
|
This is used by the _list completer, which
prevents the insertion of completions until a second
completion attempt when the line has not changed. The normal
way of finding out if the line has changed is to compare its
entire contents between the two occasions. If this style is
true, the comparison is instead performed only on the
current word. Hence if completion is performed on another
word with the same contents, completion will not be
delayed. |
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The
initialization script compinit redefines all the
widgets which perform completion to call the supplied widget
function _main_complete. This function acts as a
wrapper calling the so−called ’completer’
functions that generate matches. If _main_complete is
called with arguments, these are taken as the names of
completer functions to be called in the order given. If no
arguments are given, the set of functions to try is taken
from the completer style. For example, to use normal
completion and correction if that doesn’t generate any
matches:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete
_correct
after calling
compinit. The default value for this style is
’_complete _ignored’, i.e. normally only
ordinary completion is tried, first with the effect of the
ignored−patterns style and then without it. The
_main_complete function uses the return value of the
completer functions to decide if other completers should be
called. If the return value is zero, no other completers are
tried and the _main_complete function returns.
If the first
argument to _main_complete is a single hyphen, the
arguments will not be taken as names of completers. Instead,
the second argument gives a name to use in the
completer field of the context and the other
arguments give a command name and arguments to call to
generate the matches.
The following
completer functions are contained in the distribution (users
may write their own):
_all_matches
This completer can be used to
add a string consisting of all other matches. To ensure,
that this string is always added, this completer has to be
used as the first completer in the list. The
avoid−completer style is used to decide if the
string should be added. This will only be done if the
matches were generated by a completer not named by one of
the values of the style.
This function
also uses the style old−matches. If it is set
to ’true’ or to the string
’only’ and there is a list of matches
from a previous completion, those matches will be inserted
in the command line. If it is set to the the string
’only’, it will only insert an old list
and won’t add the string for all matches of the list
currently being generated.
With the
old−matches style set, this completer should
probably not be called unconditionally. Instead one could
use the −e option of the zstyle builtin
command to add a condition to the completer or to the
old−matches style. Alternatively, one could use
the _generic function to bind _all_matches to
a separate key binding, for example:
zle −C
all−matches complete−word _generic
bindkey ’^Xa’ all−matches
zstyle ’:completion:all−matches::::’
old−matches only
zstyle ’:completion:all−matches:*’
completer _all_matches
_approximate
This completer function uses
the _complete completer to generate a list of strings
for the context the cursor is currently in, allowing you to
specify a maximum number of errors: see the description of
approximate matching in zshexpn(1) for how errors are
counted. The resulting list of corrected and completed
strings is then presented to the user. The intended use of
this completer function is to try after the normal
_complete completer by setting:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete
_approximate
This will give
correcting completion if and only if normal completion
yields no possible completions. When corrected completions
are found, the completer will normally start menu completion
allowing you to cycle through these strings.
This completer
uses the tags corrections and original when
generating the possible corrections and the original string.
The format style for the former may contain the
additional sequences ’%e’ and
’%o’ which will be replaced by the number
of errors accepted to generate the corrections and the
original string, respectively.
As with all
completers, _approximate uses its name without the
underscore in the completer field of the context
name. Once it has started trying to generate matches, it
will append a minus sign and the number of errors accepted
to its name. _approximate will first look for
completions with one error, then two, and on so up to the
limit on the number of errors set by the
max−errors style. Hence on the first try the
completer field of the context contains
’approximate−1’, on the second try
’approximate−2’, and so on.
When
_approximate is called from another function, the
number of errors to accept may be given with the
−a option. Its argument should be the same as
the value of the max−errors style, all in one
string.
Note that this
completer (and the _correct completer mentioned
below) can be quite expensive to call, especially when a
large number of errors are allowed. One way to avoid this is
to set up the completer style using the
−e option to zstyle so that some completers are
only used when completion is attempted a second time on the
same string, e.g.:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer ’
if [[ $_last_try != "$HISTNO$BUFFER$CURSOR" ]];
then
_last_try="$HISTNO$BUFFER$CURSOR"
reply=(_complete _match _prefix)
else
reply=(_ignored _correct _approximate)
fi’
This uses the
HISTNO parameter and the BUFFER and
CURSOR special parameters that are available inside
zle and completion widgets to find out if the command line
hasn’t changed since the last time completion was
tried. Only then are the _ignored, _correct
and _approximate completers called.
_complete
This completer generates all
possible completions in a context−sensitive manner,
i.e. using the settings defined with the compdef
function explained above and the current settings of all
special parameters. This gives the normal completion
behaviour.
To complete
arguments of commands, _complete uses the utility
function _normal, which is in turn responsible for
finding the particular function; it is described below.
Various contexts of the form
−context−, as mentioned
above for the #compdef tag, are handled specially.
These are:
−array−value−
for completion on the right
hand side of an array−assignment
(’foo=(...)’).
−brace−parameter−
for completing the name of a
parameter expansion within braces
(’${...}’).
−command−
for completing in a command
position.
−condition−
for completion inside
conditions (’[[...]]’).
−default−
for generating completions when
no special completion function is used.
−equal−
for completion of words
beginning with an equals sign
−first−
for adding completions before
any other completion functions are tried; if this function
sets the _compskip parameter to all, no other
completion functions will be called, if it is set to a
string containing the substring patterns, no pattern
completion functions will be called, and if it is set to a
string containing default the function for the
’−default−’ context will not
be called, but functions defined for commands will.
|
−math− |
|
for completion inside mathematical contexts, such as
’((...))’. |
−parameter−
for completing the name of a
parameter expansion (’$...’).
−redirect−
for completion after a
redirection operator.
−subscript−
for completion inside
subscripts.
−tilde−
for completion after a tilde
(’~’) character, but before a slash.
−value−
for completion on the right
hand side of an assignment.
Default
implementations are supplied for each of these contexts, in
most cases named after the context itself (e.g. completion
for the ’−tilde−’ context is
done by the function named ’_tilde’).
Before trying
to find a function for a specific context, _complete
checks if the parameter ’compcontext’ is
set. If it is set to an array, the elements are taken to be
the possible matches which will be completed using the tag
’values’ and the description
’value’. If it is set to an associative
array, the keys are used as the possible completions and the
values (if non−empty) are used as descriptions for the
matches. If ’compcontext’ is set to a
string containing colons, it should be of the form
’tag:descr:action’.
In this case the tag and descr give the tag
and description to use and the action says what
should be completed in one of the forms described for the
_arguments utility function below.
Finally, if
’compcontext’ is set to a string without
colons, the value is taken as the name of the context to use
and the function defined for that context will be called.
For this purpose, there is a special context named
−command−line− that completes whole
command lines (commands and their arguments) and is not used
by the completion system itself, but has a function handling
completion for it.
_correct
Generate corrections, but not
completions, for the current word; this is similar to
_approximate but will not allow any number of extra
characters at the cursor as that completer does, hence this
is similar to spell−checking. It calls
_approximate but uses a different completer
field in the context name.
For example,
with:
zstyle
’:completion:::::’ completer _complete _correct
_approximate
zstyle ’:completion:*:correct:::’
max−errors 2 not−numeric
zstyle ’:completion:*:approximate:::’
max−errors 3 numeric
correction will
accept up to two errors. If a numeric argument is given,
correction will not be performed, but correcting completion
will be, and will accept as many errors as given by the
numeric argument. Without a numeric argument, first
correction and then correcting completion will be tried,
with the first one accepting two errors and the second one
accepting three errors.
When
_correct is called as a function, the number of
errors to accept may be given following the −a
option. The argument should be the same as the value of the
accept style, all in one string.
This completer
function is intended to be used without the
_approximate completer or, as in the example, just
before it. Using it after the _approximate completer
is useless since _approximate will at least generate
the corrected strings generated by the _correct
completer −− and probably more.
_expand
This completer function does
not really do completion, but instead checks if the word on
the command line is eligible for expansion and, if it is,
gives detailed control over how this expansion is done. When
using this, one should not use the
expand−or−complete widget, but instead
use complete−word, as
expand−or−complete will expand the string
on the line before the completion widget is called. Also,
this completer should be called before the _complete
completer function.
The tags used
when generating expansions are all−expansions
for the string containing all possible expansions,
expansions when adding the possible expansions as
single matches and original when adding the original
string from the line. In which order these strings are
generated and which of these strings are generated at all
can be controlled by using the group−order
style and by modifying the tag−order style, as
usual.
The format
string for all−expansions and for
expansions may contain the sequence
’%o’ which will be replaced by the
original string from the line.
Which kind of
expansion is tried is controlled by the substitute,
glob and subst−globs−only
styles.
When
_expand is called as a function, the different modes
may be selected with options. The −s to
substitute, −g to glob and
−o to subst−globs−only.
_expand_alias
If the word the cursor is on is
an alias, it is expanded and no other completers are called.
The types of aliases which are to be expanded can be
controlled with the regular, global and
disabled styles.
This function
is also a bindable command, see the section ’Bindable
Commands’ below.
_history
Complete words from the
shell’s command history. This completer uses the
remove−all−dups, and sort styles
also used by the _history_complete_word bindable
command, see the section ’Bindable Commands’
below and the section ’Completion System
Configuration’ above.
_ignored
The
ignored−patterns style can be set to a list of
patterns which are compared against possible completions;
matching ones are removed. With this completer those matches
can be reinstated, as if no ignored−patterns
style were set. The completer actually generates its own
list of matches; which completers are used for this is
determined in the same way as for the _prefix
completer.
The
single−ignored style is used if only one match
could be generated. It can be set to show to prevent
that match from being displayed or inserted into the line,
or it can be set to menu, in which case the single
match and the original string from the line will be offered
in a menu completion.
|
_list |
|
This completer allows one to delay the insertion of
matches until completion is attempted a second time without
the word on the line being changed. On the first attempt,
only the list of matches will be shown. It is affected by
the styles condition and word, see the section
’Completion System Configuration’ above. |
|
_match |
|
This completer is intended to be used after the
_complete completer. It allows one to give patterns
on the command line and to complete all strings matching
these patterns from the set of possible completions for the
context the cursor is in, without having to set the
GLOB_COMPLETE option. |
Normally this
will be done by taking the pattern from the line, inserting
a ’*’ at the cursor position and
comparing the resulting pattern with the possible
completions generated. However, if the
match−original style has a value of
only, no ’*’ will be inserted. If
match−original has any other non−empty
string as its value, this completer will first try to
generate matches without, then with a ’*’
inserted at the cursor position.
The generated
matches will be offered in a menu completion unless the
insert−unambiguous style is set to
’true’. In this case menu completion will only
be started if no unambiguous string could be generated that
is at least as long as the original string. The style may
also be set to the string ’pattern’. This
will keep the pattern on the line intact as long as there
isn’t an unambiguous completion with which it could be
replaced.
Note that the
matcher specifications defined globally or used by the
completion functions will not be used.
|
_menu |
|
This completer is a simple
example function implemented to show how menu completion can
be done in shell code. It should be used as the first
completer and has the effect of making the code perform menu
completion. Note that this is independent of the setting of
the MENU_COMPLETE option and does not work with the
other menu completion widgets such as
reverse−menu−complete, or
accept−and−menu−complete. |
_oldlist
This completer controls how the
standard completion widgets behave when there is an existing
list of completions which may have been generated by a
special completion (i.e. a separately−bound completion
command). It allows the ordinary completion keys to continue
to use the list of completions thus generated, instead of
producing a new list of ordinary contextual completions. It
should appear in the list of completers before any of the
widgets which generate matches. It uses two styles:
old−list and old−menu, see the
section ’Completion System Configuration’
above.
_prefix
This completer can be used to
try completion with the suffix (everything after the cursor)
ignored. In other words, the suffix will not be considered
to be part of the word to complete and hence does not need
to be matched. It uses the completer style to decide
which other completers to call to try to generate matches.
If this style is unset, the list of completers set for the
current context is used −− except, of course,
the _prefix completer itself. Furthermore, if this
completer appears more than once in the list of completers
only those completers not already tried by the last
invocation of _prefix will be called.
For example,
consider this global completer style:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer \
_complete _prefix _correct _prefix:foo
Here, the
_prefix completer tries normal completion but
ignoring the suffix. If that doesn’t generate any
matches, and neither does the call to the _correct
completer after it, _prefix will be called a second
time and, now only trying correction with the suffix
ignored. If you want to use _prefix as the last
resort and try only normal completion, you can use:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer _complete ... _prefix
zstyle ’:completion::prefix:*’ completer
_complete
The
add−space style is also used. If it is set to
’true’ then _prefix will insert a space
between the matches generated (if any) and the suffix.
Note that this
completer is only useful if the COMPLETE_IN_WORD
option is set; otherwise, the cursor will be moved to the
end of the current word before the completion code is called
and hence there will be no suffix.
bashcompinit
This function provides
compatibility with bash’s programmable completion
system. When run it will define the functions,
compgen and complete which correspond to the
bash builtins with the same names. It will then be possible
to use completion specifications and functions written for
bash.
BINDABLE COMMANDS
In addition to
the context−dependent completions provided, which are
expected to work in an intuitively obvious way, there are a
few widgets implementing special behaviour which can be
bound separately to keys. The following is a list of these
and their default bindings.
_bash_completions
This function is used by two
widgets, _bash_complete−word and
_bash_list−choices. It exists to provide
compatibility with completion bindings in bash. The last
character of the binding determines what is completed:
’!’, command names;
’$’, environment variables;
’@’, host names; ’/’,
file names; ’~’ user names. In bash, the
binding preceded by ’\e’ gives
completion, and preceded by ’^X’ lists
options. As some of these bindings clash with standard zsh
bindings, only ’\e~’ and
’^X~’ are bound by default. To add the
rest, the following should be added to .zshrc after
compinit has been run:
for key in
’!’ ’$’ ’@’
’/’ ’~’; do
bindkey "\e$key" _bash_complete−word
bindkey "^X$key" _bash_list−choices
done
This includes
the bindings for ’~’ in case they were
already bound to something else; the completion code does
not override user bindings.
_correct_filename
(^XC)
Correct the filename path at
the cursor position. Allows up to six errors in the name.
Can also be called with an argument to correct a filename
path, independently of zle; the correction is printed on
standard output.
_correct_word (^Xc)
Performs correction of the
current argument using the usual contextual completions as
possible choices. This stores the string
’correct−word’ in the
function field of the context name and then calls the
_correct completer.
_expand_alias (^Xa)
This function can be used as a
completer and as a bindable command. It expands the word the
cursor is on if it is an alias. The types of aliases
expanded can be controlled with the regular,
global and disabled styles.
When used as a
bindable command there is one additional feature that can be
selected by setting the complete style to
’true’. In this case, if the word isn’t
the name of an alias, _expand_alias tries to complete
the word to a full alias name without expanding it (but
leaving the cursor directly after the completed word so that
invoking _expand_alias once more will expand the
now−complete alias name).
_expand_word (^Xe)
Performs expansion on the
current word: equivalent to the standard
expand−word command, but using the
_expand completer. Before calling it, the
function field is set to
’expand−word’.
_generic
This function is not defined as
a widget and not bound by default. However, it can be used
to define a widget and will then store the name of the
widget in the function field of the context and call
the completion system. This allows custom completion widgets
with their own set of style settings to be easily defined.
For example, to define a widget that does normal completion
and starts menu selection, one could do:
zle −C
foo complete−word _generic
bindkey ’...’ foo
zstyle ’:completion:foo:*’ menu yes
select=1
_history_complete_word
(\e/)
Complete words from the
shell’s command history. This uses the list,
remove−all−dups, sort, and
stop styles.
_most_recent_file
(^Xm)
Complete the name of the most
recently modified file matching the pattern on the command
line (which may be blank). If given a numeric argument
N, complete the Nth most recently modified
file. Note the completion, if any, is always unique.
_next_tags (^Xn)
This command alters the set of
matches used to that for the next tag, or set of tags,
either as given by the tag−order style or as
set by default; these matches would otherwise not be
available. Successive invocations of the command cycle
through all possible sets of tags.
_read_comp (^X^R)
Prompt the user for a string,
and use that to perform completion on the current word.
There are two possibilities for the string. First, it can be
a set of words beginning ’_’, for example
’_files −/’, in which case the
function with any arguments will be called to generate the
completions. Unambiguous parts of the function name will be
completed automatically (normal completion is not available
at this point) until a space is typed.
Second, any
other string will be passed as a set of arguments to
compadd and should hence be an expression specifying
what should be completed.
A very
restricted set of editing commands is available when reading
the string: ’DEL’ and
’^H’ delete the last character;
’^U’ deletes the line, and
’^C’ and ’^G’ abort
the function, while ’RET’ accepts the
completion. Note the string is used verbatim as a command
line, so arguments must be quoted in accordance with
standard shell rules.
Once a string
has been read, the next call to _read_comp will use
the existing string instead of reading a new one. To force a
new string to be read, call _read_comp with a numeric
argument.
_complete_debug
(^X?)
This widget performs ordinary
completion, but captures in a temporary file a trace of the
shell commands executed by the completion system. Each
completion attempt gets its own file. A command to view each
of these files is pushed onto the editor buffer stack.
_complete_help (^Xh)
This widget displays
information about the context names, the tags, and the
completion functions used when completing at the current
cursor position. If given a numeric argument other than
1 (as in ’ESC−2 ^Xh’), then
the styles used and the contexts for which they are used
will be shown, too.
Note that the
information about styles may be incomplete; it depends on
the information available from the completion functions
called, which in turn is determined by the user’s own
styles and other settings.
_complete_tag (^Xt)
This widget completes symbol
tags created by the etags or ctags programmes
(note there is no connection with the completion
system’s tags) stored in a file TAGS, in the
format used by etags, or tags, in the format
created by ctags. It will look back up the path
hierarchy for the first occurrence of either file; if both
exist, the file TAGS is preferred. You can specify
the full path to a TAGS or tags file by
setting the parameter $TAGSFILE or $tagsfile
respectively. The corresponding completion tags used are
etags and vtags, after emacs and vi
respectively.
UTILITY FUNCTIONS
Descriptions
follow for utility functions that may be useful when writing
completion functions. Most of these reside in the
Base subdirectory. Like the example functions for
commands in the distribution, the utility functions
generating matches all follow the convention of returning
zero if they generated completions and non−zero if no
matching completions could be added.
When writing
completion functions or other ZLE widgets that call
completion, it might be interesting to know about two more
features offered by the _main_complete function. The
arrays compprefuncs and comppostfuncs may be
set to contain names of functions that are to be called
immediately before or after completion has been tried. The
functions will only be called once, unless they put
themselves into the arrays again.
_all_labels [ −12VJ ] tag name descr
[ command args ... ]
This is a convenient interface
to the _next_label function below, implementing the
loop shown in the _next_label example. The
command is the one that should be called to generate
the matches. The options stored in the parameter name
will automatically be inserted into the args given to
the command. Normally, they are put directly after
the command, but if one of the args is a
single hyphen, they are inserted directly before that. If
the hyphen is the last argument, that will be removed from
the argument list before the command is called. This
allows _all_labels to be used in almost all cases
where the matches can be generated by a single call to the
compadd builtin command or by a call to one of the
utility functions.
For
example:
local expl
...
if _requested foo; then
...
_all_labels foo expl ’...’ compadd ... −
$matches
fi
Will complete
the strings from the matches parameter, using
compadd with additional options which will take
precedence over those generated by _all_labels.
_alternative [
−C name ] specs ...
This function is useful in
simple cases where multiple tags are available. Essentially,
it implements a loop like the one described for the
_tags function above.
The tags to use
and the action to perform if a tag is requested are
described using the specs which are of the form:
’tag:descr:action’.
The tags are offered using _tags and if the
tag is requested, the action is executed with the
given description descr. The actions supported
are those used by the _arguments function (described
below), without the
’−>state’ and
’=...’ forms.
For example,
the action may be a simple function call. With that
one could do:
_alternative
\
’users:user:_users’ \
’hosts:host:_hosts’
to offer
usernames and hostnames as possible matches (which are
generated by the _users and _hosts functions
respectively).
Note that, like
_arguments this will also use _all_labels to
execute the actions, so one doesn’t need to call that
explicitly unless another tag is to be used, for example in
a function called from _alternative.
Like
_tags this function supports the −C
option to give a different name for the argument context
field.
_arguments [
−ACS ] [ −O name ] [
−M matchspec ] spec ...
This function can be used to
complete words on the line by describing the options and
arguments which may be passed to the command for which
completion is being performed. The description is given as
arguments to this function, with each spec describing
one option or normal argument of the command. The forms of
spec understood are:
n:message:action
n::message:action
This describes the
n’th normal argument. The message will
be printed above the matches generated and the action
says what can be completed in this position (see below). If
there are two colons before the message, this
describes an optional argument. If the message
contains only white space, nothing will be printed above the
matches unless the action adds an explanation string
itself.
:message:action
::message:action
Like the previous one, but
describing the next argument. I.e. if you want to
describe all arguments a command can get, you can leave out
the numbers in the description and just use this form to
describe them one after another in the order they have to
appear on the line.
*:message:action
*::message:action
*:::message:action
This describes how arguments
(usually non−option arguments, those not beginning
with − or +) are to be completed when no
description with one of the first two forms was given. This
also means that any number of arguments can be
completed.
With two colons
before the message, the words special array
and the CURRENT special parameter are modified to
refer only to the normal arguments when the action is
executed or evaluated. With three colons before the
message they are modified to refer only to the normal
arguments covered by this description.
optspec[description
...]
This describes an option and
(if description is given) the arguments that have to
come after the option. If no description is given,
this means to offer only the option name as a possible
completion in the right places. (Note that the brackets,
above, around description, indicate that zero or more
descriptions may appear; but the brackets are not
themselves part of this format. If brackets are used, they
are part of the optspec; see below.)
In the
descriptions below, the option names represented by
optname are normally taken to be
multi−character names, and a word from the line is
considered to contain only one option (or none). By giving
the −s option to _arguments before the
first spec, each optname is considered to be a
single character and each word from the line may contain
more than one such option letter. However, words beginning
with two hyphens (like
’−−prefix’) are still
considered to contain only one option name. This allows the
use of the ’−s’ option to describe
single−letter options together with such long option
names.
The
−s option may be combined with the option
−w to say that more option characters are to be
expected even after an option that takes an argument. For
example, if a command takes the options
’a’ and ’b’, where
’a’ takes an argument in the next word,
_arguments would normally not complete the other
option directly after ’−a’, but it
would allow that if given the −w option.
Similarly, the
option −W may be given together with
−s to force completion of single−letter
options even after options that get an argument in the same
word. For example, if a command takes the options
’a’ and ’b’, where
’a’ needs an argument in the same word,
directly after the option character, _arguments would
normally only execute the action for that argument and not
offer other single−letter options as possible
completions. If given the −W option, it will
offer other options as possible completions after executing
the action for the argument. Note that, depending on the
action, this may mean that the other options can’t
really be completed, but at least they will be listed. For
more control, use an utility function like _guard in
the argument’s action.
The forms of
optspec are:
*optspec
If the option may be given more
than once, a star (’*’) must be added in
front of one of the following forms of optspec.
Otherwise, if the option is already on the line and to the
left of the cursor, it is not offered as a possible
completion again.
−optname
+optname
In the simplest form the
optspec is just the option name beginning with a
minus or a plus sign, such as
’−foo’. The first argument for the
option (if any) must follow as a separate word
directly after the option.
If the command
accepts the option with either a leading minus or a leading
plus sign, use either
’−+optname’ or
’+−optname’ to define both
variants at once.
In all the
following forms, the leading ’−’
may be replaced or paired with ’+’ in
this way.
−optname−
The first argument of the
option must come directly after the option name in the
same word, as in
’−foo−:...’.
−optname+
The first argument may appear
immediately after optname in the same word, or may
instead appear as a separate word after the option.
−optname=
The argument may appear as the
next word, or in same word as the option name provided that
it is separated from it by an equals sign.
−optname=−
The argument to the option must
appear after an equals sign in the same word, and may not be
given in the next argument.
optspec[explanation]
An explanation string may be
appended to any of the preceding forms of optspec by
enclosing it in brackets, as in ’−q[query
operation]’.
The
verbose style is used to decide if these explanation
strings should be displayed with the option in a completion
listing.
If no bracketed
explanation string is given but the
auto−description style is set and only one
argument is described for this optspec, the value of
the style is displayed, with any appearance of the sequence
’%d’ in it replaced by the message
of the first description that follows the
optspec; see below.
Note that the
special meaning of a leading or trailing − or
+ in optspec means that when the command to be
completed accepts options like ’−+’
or ’−=’, the second character has
to be quoted with a backslash, as in
’−\+’.
Each
description following an optspec must take one
of the following forms:
:message:action
::message:action
Describes a mandatory argument
with one colon, or an optional argument with two colons. As
in other forms of spec, the message will be
printed above the matches generated (unless it contains only
white space, see above) and the action says what can
be completed in this position.
:*pattern:message:action
:*pattern::message:action
:*pattern:::message:action
This describes multiple
arguments. Only the last description may be given in
this form. If the pattern is empty (i.e.,
:*:), all following words on the line are to be
completed as described by the action; otherwise, all
words up to a word matching the pattern are to be
completed using the action.
When the
message is preceded by two colons, the words
special array and the CURRENT special parameter are
modified during the execution or evaluation of the
action to refer only to the words after the option.
When preceded by three colons, they are modified to refer
only to the words covered by this description.
Note that only
one such ’:*’−specification is
useful and no other argument specification may be given
after it.
To include a
colon in any optname, message, or
action anywhere above, it has to be preceded by a
backslash, as ’\:’.
Each of the six
forms of spec (yes, there are six, keep track of the
nestings) may be preceded by a list of option names and
argument numbers with which the option or argument described
is mutually exclusive. This list is given in parentheses, as
in ’(−two −three
1)−one:...’ or
’(−foo):...’. In the first example,
the options ’−two’ and
’−three’ and the first argument
will not be offered as possible completions if the option
’−one’ is on the line before the
cursor, and in the second example the option
’−foo’ will not be offered if the
argument described by the specification is on the line.
The list may
also contain a single star (*) as one of its elements
to specify that the description for the rest arguments (i.e.
a specification of the form ’*:...’)
should not be used, a colon (:) to specify that the
descriptions for all normal (non−option−)
arguments should not be used and a hyphen (−)
to specify that the descriptions for all options should not
be used. This paragraph desperately needs rewriting.
To simplify
writing writing functions that call _arguments more
than once, the specs may also start with the
character ’!’ (exclamation mark) to make
the spec not be completed. However, if this is used
with one of the forms describing options, the option (and
its arguments, if it takes any) will be understood and
skipped if they appear on the command line. It’s just
that the option itself will not be completed. This is
intended to be used with an array containing the options
used in the first call to arguments. The second call
can then use ’\!${^global_options}’ to
ignore those options and complete only the ones understood
in the current context.
In every case
above, the action determines how the possible
completions should be generated. In places where no sensible
matches can be generated, the action should consist of only
a space. This will make the message be displayed but
no possible completions listed. Note that even in this case
the colon at the end of the message is needed. The
only case where it can be left is when neither a
message, nor a action is given.
Except for the
’−>string’ form below,
the action will be executed by calling the
_all_labels function to process all tag labels, so
one doesn’t need to call that explicitly unless
another tag is to be used, for example in a function called
in the action.
When only one
of a fixed set of strings can be completed, the
action can consist of these strings as a list in
parentheses, as in:
:foo:(foo
bar baz)
Such a list in
doubled parentheses should contain strings consisting of the
string to complete followed by ’\:’ and a
description, as in:
:foo:((a\:bar
b\:baz))
The matches
will be listed together with their descriptions if the
description style for the values tag is
set.
An
action of the form
’−>string’ is used by
functions that implement a state machine. In this case, the
’string’s (with all leading and trailing
spaces and tabs removed) of all actions that have to be used
will be stored in the global array state. The
function returns with a non−zero return value if the
cursor is not in a position where options can be completed
or if the current word could not be completed to an option.
But if the −R option is given to
_arguments, the function will instead return with a
return value of 300 (to make it distinguishable from other
return values) after setting the global
’context’, ’line’ and
’opt_args’ parameters as described below,
and without resetting any changes made to the special
parameters such as PREFIX and words. This
enables wrapper functions around _arguments to be
able to find out if they have to make sure that the special
completion parameters are not reset when they return.
Note that this
means that a function calling _arguments with at
least one action containing such a
’−>string’ has to declare
appropriate local parameters as in:
local
context state line
typeset −A opt_args
This will
ensure that _arguments does not create unused global
parameters.
A string in
braces is evaluated to generate the matches and if the
action does not begin with an opening parentheses or
brace, it is also split into separate words and executed. If
the action starts with a space, this list of words
will be invoked unchanged, otherwise it will be invoked with
some extra strings placed after the first word which can be
given as arguments to the compadd builtin command and
which make sure that the message given in the
description will be shown above the matches. These arguments
are taken from the array parameter ’expl’
which will be set up before executing the action and
hence may be used in it (normally in an expansion like
’$expl[@]’).
If the
action starts with ’= ’ (an equals
sign followed by a space), _arguments will insert the
contents of the argument field of the current context
as the new first element in the words special array
and increments the value of the CURRENT special
parameter. In other words, it inserts a dummy element in the
words array and makes CURRENT still point to
the word in that array where the cursor is. This is only
really useful when used with one of the forms that make
_arguments modify the words array to contain
only some of the words from the line, i.e. one of the
argument description forms where the message is
preceded by two or three colons. For example, when the
function called in the action for such an argument itself
uses _arguments, the dummy element is needed to make
that second call to _arguments use all words from the
restricted range for argument parsing. Without the inserted
dummy element, the first word in the range would be taken
(by the second _arguments) to be the command name and
hence ignored.
During the
evaluation or execution of the action the array
’line’ will be set to the command name
and normal arguments from the command line, i.e. to the
words from the command line excluding all options and their
arguments. These are stored in the associative array
’opt_args’, using the option names as
keys and their arguments as the values. For options that
have more than one argument these are given as one string,
separated by colons. All colons in the original arguments
are preceded with backslashes.
The parameter
’context’ (set only in the calling
function when using an action of the form
’−>string’, not during
the evaluation of other actions) is set to the
automatically created context names. These are either
strings of the form
’option−opt−n’
for the n’th argument of the option
−opt, or strings of the form
’argument−n’ for the
n’th argument (for rest arguments the n
is the string ’rest’). For example, when
completing the argument of the −o option, the
name is ’option−o−1’ and for
the second normal (non−option−) argument it is
’argument−2’.
Also, during
the evaluation of the action, the context name in the
curcontext parameter is changed by appending the same
string that is stored in the context parameter.
It is also
possible to specify multiple sets of options and arguments
with the sets separated by single hyphens. The
specifications before the first hyphen are shared by all
sets given after the first hyphen. The first word in every
other set gives the name of the set. This name may appear in
exclusion lists in the specifications, either alone or
before one of the possible values described above (with a
’−’ between the name and the
rest).
For
example:
_arguments \
−a \
− set1 \
−c \
− set2 \
−d \
’:arg:(x2 y2)’
This defines
two sets. When the command line contains the option
’−c’, the
’−d’ option and the argument will
not be considered possible completions. When it contains
’−d’ or an argument, the option
’−c’ will not be completed any
more, but if ’−a’ is given, both
sets will still be considered valid, because it appears
before the first hyphen, so both sets contain this
option.
If the
name−string is of the form
’(name)’ then all
specifications in the set have an implicit exclusion list
containing the name of the set, i.e. all specifications are
mutual exclusive with all other specifications in the same
set. This is useful for defining multiple sets of options
which are mutually exclusive and in which the options are
aliases for each other. E.g.:
_arguments \
−a −b \
− ’(compress)’ \
{−c,−−compress}’[compress]’ \
− ’(uncompress)’ \
{−d,−−decompress}’[decompress]’
Note that using
multiple sets will be slower than using only one set because
the completion code has to parse the command line once for
every set. So more than one set should only be used if the
command syntax is too complicated. Note also that an option
specification with rest−arguments (as in
’−foo:*:...’) often allows the use
of multiple sets to be avoided.
To simplify the
specifications for commands with standard option parsing,
the options −S and −A may be
given. With −S, no option will be completed
after a ’−−’ on the line and
this argument will otherwise be ignored. With
−A, no options will be completed after the
first non−option argument on the line. The
−A has to be followed by a pattern matching all
strings which are not to be taken as arguments. For example,
to make _arguments stop completing options after the
first normal argument, but ignoring all strings starting
with a hyphen even if they are not described by one of the
optspecs, one would use: ’−A
"−*"’.
Another option
supported is ’−O name’. The
name will be taken as the name of an array and its
elements will be given to functions called to generate
matches when executing the actions. For example, this
allows one to give options for the compadd builtin
that should be used for all actions.
Also, the
−M option followed by a string may be given
before the first description. The string will be used as the
match specification when completing option names and values
instead of the default ’r:|[_−]=*
r:|=*’.
Finally, the
option −C can be given to make
_arguments modify the curcontext parameter
when an action of the form
’−>state’ is used. This
parameter is used to keep track of the current context and
in this case it (and not the parameter context as
explained above) has to be made local to make sure that
calling functions don’t use the modified value. Also,
the local version of curcontext has to be initialised
with the old value as in:
local
curcontext="$curcontext"
The function
can also be made to automatically complete long options for
commands that support the
’−−help’ option as, for
example, most of the GNU commands do. For this, the string
’−−’ must be given as one
argument and if it is, the command from the line is invoked
with the ’−−help’ option and
its output is parsed to find possible option names. Note
that this means that you should be careful to make sure that
this feature is not used for a command that does not support
this option.
For such
automatically found options that get an argument after an
’=’, the function also tries to
automatically find out what should be completed as the
argument. The possible completions for
option−arguments can be described with the arguments
after the ’−−’ (which are not
used as described above). Each argument contains one
description of the form
’pattern:message:action’.
The message and the action have the same
format as for the normal option descriptions described
above. The action will be executed to complete
arguments of options whose description in the output of the
command from the line with the
’−−help’ option matches the
pattern. For example:
_arguments
−− ’*\*:toggle:(yes no)’ \
’*=FILE*:file:_files’ \
’*=DIR*:directory:_files −/’
Here,
’yes’ and ’no’ will be
completed as the argument of options whose description ends
in a star, file names for options that contain the substring
’=FILE’ in the description, and paths for
options whose description contains
’=DIR’. In fact, the last two patterns
are not needed since this function always completes files
for option descriptions containing
’=FILE’ and paths for option descriptions
that contain ’=DIR’ or
’=PATH’. These builtin patterns can be
overridden by patterns given as arguments, however.
Note also that
_arguments tries to find out automatically if the
argument for an option is optional. If it fails to
automatically detect this, the colon before the
message can be doubled to tell it about this as
described for the normal option descriptions above.
If the
pattern ends in ’(−)’, this
will removed from the pattern and the action will be
used only directly after the ’=’, not in
the next word. I.e., this is like a normal specification as
described above using ’=−’.
The option
’−i patterns’ (which must be
given after the ’−−’) can be
used to give patterns for options which should not be
completed. The patterns can be given as the name of an array
parameter or as a literal list in parentheses. E.g.
’−i
"(−−(en|dis)able−FEATURE*)"’
will make the options
’−−enable−FEATURE’ and
’−−disable−FEATURE’ be
ignored. The option ’−s
pairs’ (again, after the
’−−’) can be used to describe
option aliases. Each pair consists of a pattern and a
replacement. E.g. some configure−scripts
describe options only as
’−−enable−foo’, but
also accept
’−−disable−foo’. To
allow completion of the second form, one would use
’−s "(#−−enable−
−−disable−)"’.
Example:
_arguments
’−l+:left border:’ \
’−format:paper size:(letter A4)’ \
’*−copy:output file:_files::resolution:(300
600)’ \
’:postscript file:_files −g
\*.\(ps\|eps\)’ \
’*:page number:’
This describes
three options: ’−l’,
’−format’, and
’−copy’. The first one gets one
argument described as ’left border’ for
which no completion will be offered because of the empty
action. The argument may come directly after the
’−l’ or it may be given as the next
word on the line. The ’−format’
option gets one argument (in the next word) described as
’paper size’ for which only the strings
’letter’ and ’A4’ will
be completed. The ’−copy’ option
differs from the first two in that it may appear more than
once on the command line and in that it accepts two
arguments. The first one is mandatory and will be completed
as a filename. The second one is optional (because of the
second colon before the description
’resolution’) and will be completed from
the strings ’300’ and
’600’.
The last two
descriptions say what should be completed as arguments. The
first one describes the first argument as a
’postscript file’ and makes files ending
in ’ps’ or ’eps’ be
completed. The last description says that all other
arguments are ’page numbers’ but does not
give possible completions.
_cache_invalid cache_identifier
This function returns 0 if the
completions cache corresponding to the given cache
identifier needs rebuilding. It determines this by looking
up the cache−policy style for the current
context, and if it exists, runs the function of the same
name, supplying the full path to the relevant cache file as
the only argument.
Example:
_example_caching_policy
() {
# rebuild if cache is more than a week old
oldp=( "$1"(Nmw+1) )
(( $#oldp ))
}
_call_function return
name [ args ... ]
If a function name
exists, it is called with the arguments args. Unless
it is the empty string or a single hyphen, return is
taken as the name of a parameter and the return status from
the called function is stored in it. The return value of
_call_function itself is zero if the function
name exists and was called and non−zero
otherwise.
_call_program tag
string ...
This function is used in places
where a command is called, making it possible for the user
to override the default command call. It looks up the
command style with the supplied tag. If the
style is set, its value is used as the command to
execute.
In any case,
the strings from the call to _call_program or
from the style are concatenated with spaces between them and
the resulting string is evaluated. The return value is the
return value of the command called.
_combination [
−s pattern ] tag style specs ...
field opts ...
This function is used to
complete combinations of values such as pairs of hostnames
and usernames. The possible values will be taken from the
style whose name is given as the second argument. The
first argument is the tag to use to do the
lookup.
The style name
should consist of multiple parts separated by hyphens which
are then used as field names. Known values for such fields
can be given after the second argument in arguments of the
form ’field=pattern’. The
first argument without an equals sign is taken as the name
of the field for which completions should be generated.
The matches
generated will be taken from the value of the style. These
values should contain the possible values for the
combinations where the values for the different fields are
separated by colons or characters matching the pattern given
after the −s option to _combination;
normally this is used to define character classes like the
’−s "[:@]"’ used for the
users−hosts style.
Only the values
for the requested fields for which the patterns given in the
’field=pattern’ match the
respective fields in the strings from the style value are
generated as possible matches.
If no style
with the given name is defined for the given tag but a
function named with the name of the requested field preceded
by an underscore is defined, that function will be called to
generate the matches. This is also done if none of the
strings in the value of the style match all the patterns
given as arguments.
If the same
name is used for more than one field, in both the
’field=pattern’ and the
argument that gives the field name to complete for, the
number of the field (starting with one) may be given after
the fieldname, separated from it by a colon.
All arguments
after the requested field name are passed to compadd
when generating matches from the style value, or to the
functions for the fields if they are called.
_contexts names
...
This function looks up the
definitions for the context and command names given as
arguments and calls the handler functions for them if there
is a definition (given with the compdef function).
For example, the function completing inside subscripts might
use ’_contexts −math−’ to
include the completions generated for mathematical
environments.
_describe [
−o ] descr name1 [ name2 ]
opts ... −− ...
This function is useful for
preparing a list of command options or arguments, together
with their descriptions descr, as matches. Multiple
groups separated by −− can be supplied,
potentially with different completion options
opts.
The
descr is taken as a string to display above the
matches if the format style for the
descriptions tag is set. After this come one or two
names of arrays followed by options to pass to
compadd. The first array contains the possible
completions with their descriptions in the form
’completion:description’.
If a second array is given, it should have the same number
of elements as the first one and the corresponding elements
are added as possible completions instead of the
completion strings from the first array. The
completion list will retain the descriptions from the first
array. Finally, a set of completion options can appear.
If the option
’−o’ appears before the first
argument, the matches added will be treated as option names
(typically following a ’−’,
’−−’ or
’+’ on the command line). This makes
_describe use the prefix−hidden,
prefix−needed and verbose styles to find
out if the strings should be added at all and if the
descriptions should be shown. Without the
’−o’ option, only the
verbose style is used.
_describe
uses the _all_labels function to generate the
matches, so it does not need to appear inside a loop over
tag labels.
_description [
−12VJ ] tag name descr [ specs
... ]
This function is called before
completions are added (typically by a call to
compadd); it tests various styles and arranges for
any necessary options to be passed on to compadd. The
styles are tested in the current context using the given
tag; options are put into the array called
name for passing on to compadd; the
description for the current set of matches is passed in
descr. The styles tested are: format (which is
first tested for the given tag and then for the
descriptions tag if that isn’t defined),
hidden, matcher, ignored−patterns
and group−name (the last are tested only for
the tag given as the first argument). This function also
calls the _setup function which tests some more
styles.
The string
returned by the format style (if any) will be
modified so that the sequence ’%d’ is
replaced by the descr given as the third argument
without any leading or trailing white space. If, after
removing the white space, the descr is the empty
string, the format style will not be used and the options
put into the name array will not contain an
explanation string to be displayed above the matches. If
_description is called with more than three
arguments, the additional specs should be of the form
’char:str’ and every
appearance of ’%char’ in the
format string will be replaced by string.
The options
placed in the array will also make sure that the matches are
placed in a separate group, depending on the value of the
group−name style. Normally a sorted group will
be used for this (with the ’−J’
option), but if an option starting with
’−V’,
’−J’,
’−1’, or
’−2’ is given, that option will be
included in the array, so that it is possible to make the
group unsorted by giving the option
’−V’,
’−1V’, or
’−2V’.
In most cases,
the function will be used like this:
local expl
_description files expl file
compadd "$expl[@]" −
"$files[@]"
Note the use of
the parameter expl, the hyphen, and the list of
matches. Almost all calls to compadd within the
completion system use a similar format; this ensures that
user−specified styles are correctly passed down to the
builtins which implement the internals of completion.
|
_files |
|
The function _files uses the
file−patterns style and calls
_path_files with all the arguments it was passed
except for −g and −/. These two
options are used depending on the setting of the
file−patterns style. |
See
_path_files below for a description of the full set
of options accepted by _files.
_gnu_generic
This function is a simple
wrapper around the _arguments function described
above. It can be used to automatically complete long options
for commands that understand the
’−−help’ option. It is not
intended to be used from completion functions but as a
top−level completion function in its own right. For
example, to enable option completion for the commands
foo and bar, one would call:
compdef
_gnu_generic foo bar
in one of the
initialization files after the call to compinit.
The default
installation uses this function only to generate completions
for some GNU−commands because to complete the options,
the command has to be called and hence it shouldn’t be
used if one can’t be sure that the command understands
the ’−−help’ option.
_guard [ options
] pattern [ descr ]
This function is intended to be
used in an action of functions like _arguments. It
returns immediately with a non−zero return value if
the string to be completed does not match the
pattern. If the pattern matches, the descr is
displayed and the function returns zero if the word to
complete is not empty and non−zero otherwise.
The
pattern may be preceded by those options understood
by compadd that are passed down from
_description, namely −M,
−J, −V, −1,
−2, −n, −F and
−X. All of these options, except
−X, will be ignored. If the −X
option appears, the description following it will be used as
the string to display if the pattern matches, unless
the option descr is given to _guard itself,
which will then take precedence.
As an example,
consider a command taking the options −n and
−none, where −n has to be followed
by a numeric value in the same word. By using either of:
_argument
’−n−:numeric value:_guard
"[0−9]#"’
’−none’
or
_argument
’−n−: :_guard "[0−9]#"
"numeric value"’
’−none’
_arguments
can be made to both display the message ’numeric
value’ and complete options after
’−n<TAB>’. If the
’−n’ is already followed by one or
more digits (matching the pattern given to _guard),
only the message will be displayed and if the
’−n’ is followed by another
character, only options are completed.
_message [ −r ]
descr
The descr is used like
the third argument to the _description function.
However, the resulting string will always be shown whether
or not matches were generated. This is useful to display
help texts in places where no completions can be generated
automatically.
This function
also uses the format style for the messages
tag in preference to the format style for the
descriptions tag. The latter is used only if the
former is unset.
If the
−r option is given, no style is used and the
descr is used literally as the string to display.
This is only used in cases where that string is taken from
some pre−processed argument list containing an
expanded description.
_multi_parts sep
array
This function receives two
arguments: a separator character and an array. As usual, the
array may be either the name of an array parameter or
a literal array in the form ’(foo bar)’
(i.e. a list of words separated by white space in
parentheses). With these arguments, this function will
complete to strings from the array where the parts separated
by the separator character are completed independently. For
example, the _tar function from the distribution
caches the pathnames from the tar file in an array, and then
calls this function to complete these names in the way
normal filenames are completed by the _path_files
function, by using ’_multi_parts /
patharray’.
If the
−i option is present, then any time there is a
unique match it will immediately be inserted even if that
requires additional separators to be inserted as well. When
completing from a fixed set of possible completions which
are really words, this is often the expected behaviour;
however, if _multi_parts should behave like
completing pathnames, the −i option should not
be used.
Like other
utility functions, this function accepts the
’−V’,
’−J’,
’−1’,
’−2’,
’−n’,
’−f’,
’−X’,
’−M’,
’−P’,
’−S’,
’−r’,
’−R’, and
’−q’ options and passes them to the
compadd builtin.
_next_label [
−12VJ ] tag name descr [ options
... ]
This function should be called
repeatedly to generate the tag labels. On each call it will
check if another tag label is to be used and, if there is at
least one, zero is returned. If no more tag labels are to be
used, a non−zero status is returned.
The
−12JV options and the first three arguments are
given to the _description function using the tag
label instead of the first argument as appropriate. The
options given after the descr should be other
options to be used for compadd or whatever function
is to be called to add the matches. _next_label will
store these options in the parameter whose
name is given as the second argument. This is done in
such a way that the description given by the user to the
tag−order style is preferred over the one given
to _next_label.
Note that this
function must not be called without a previous call to
_tags or _requested because it uses the tag
label for the current tag found by these functions.
A normal use of
this function for the tag labels of the tag foo looks
like this:
local expl
ret=1
...
if _requested foo; then
...
while _next_label foo expl ’...’; do
compadd "$expl[@]" ... && ret=0
done
...
fi
return ret
_normal
This function is used for
normal command completion. It has two tasks: completing the
first word on the command line as the name of a command, and
completing the arguments to this command. In the second
case, the name of the command is looked up to see if special
completions exists, including completions defined for
patterns which match the name. If none is found, completion
is performed for the context
−default−.
The function
can also be called by other completion functions which need
to treat a range of words as a command line. For example,
the function to complete after the pre−command
specifiers such as nohup removes the first word from
the words array, decrements the CURRENT
parameter, then calls _normal again, with the effect
that ’nohup cmd ...’ is treated
the same way was ’cmd ...’.
If the command
name matches a pattern, the parameter _compskip is
checked after the call to the corresponding completion
function. This has the same effect here as in the
−first− context: if it is set, no more
completion functions are called even if there are no matches
so far.
_options
This can be used to complete
option names. It uses a matching specification that ignores
a leading ’no’, ignores underscores and
allows the user to type upper−case letters which will
match their lower−case counterparts. All arguments
passed to this function are propagated unchanged to the
compadd builtin.
_options_set and
_options_unset
These functions complete only
set or unset options, with the same matching specification
used in the _options function.
Note that you
need to uncomment a few lines in the _main_complete
function for these functions to work properly. The lines in
question are used to store the option settings in effect
before the completion widget locally sets the options it
needs. Hence these options are not generally used by the
completion system.
_parameters
This should be used to complete
parameter names. _parameters can take a
−g pattern option which specifies that only
parameters whose type matches the pattern should be
completed. Strings of the same form as those returned by
the t parameter expansion flag are used here
when matching the type. All other arguments are passed
unchanged to the compadd builtin.
_path_files
The function _path_files
is used throughout the completion system to complete
filenames. It allows completion of partial paths. For
example, the string ’/u/i/s/sig’ may be
completed to
’/usr/include/sys/signal.h’.
The options
accepted by both _path_files and _files
are:
|
−f |
|
Complete all filenames. This is the default. |
|
−/ |
|
Specifies that only directories should be completed. |
−g
pattern
Specifies that only files
matching the pattern should be completed.
−W
paths
Specifies path prefixes that
are to be prepended to the string from the line to generate
the filenames but that should not be inserted in the line or
shown in a completion listing. Here, paths may be the
name of an array parameter, a literal list of paths enclosed
in parentheses or an absolute pathname.
|
−F |
|
This option from the compadd builtin gives direct
control over which filenames should be ignored. If the
option is not present, the ignored−patterns
style is used. |
These functions
also accept the ’−J’,
’−V’,
’−1’,
’−2’,
’−n’,
’−X’,
’−M’,
’−P’,
’−S’,
’−q’,
’−r’, and
’−R’ options from the
compadd builtin.
Finally, the
_path_files function uses the styles expand,
ambiguous, special−dirs,
list−suffixes and file−sort.
_regex_arguments name
specs ...
This function is a compiler to
generate a completion function. The first argument specifies
the name of the generated function while the remaining
arguments specify a completion as a set of regular
expressions with actions. The generated function has the
structure of a finite−state machine whose states
correspond to the state (i.e. the context) of the
completion. This state machine uses a command line, which
comes from the concatenation of the words array up to
the current cursor position using null characters as
separators with no extra quotation. This is analysed and at
the end the appropriate action is executed.
Specification
arguments take one of following forms, in which
metacharacters such as ’(’,
’)’, ’#’ and
’|’ should be quoted.
/pattern/
[%lookahead%]
[−guard]
[:tag:descr:action]
This is a primitive element,
corresponding to one state of the compiled state machine.
The state is entered if
’(#b)((#B)pattern)(#B)lookahead*’
matches the command line string. If it matches,
’guard’ is evaluated and its return
status is examined; if this is successful, the state is
entered, otherwise the test fails and other candidates are
tried. The pattern string ’[]’ is
guaranteed never to match.
If the test
succeeds and the state is entered, the left part of the
command line string matched as pattern is removed and
the next state is tried, proceeding from inside to outside
and from left to right.
If no test
succeeds and the remaining command line string contains no
null character, the completion target is restricted to the
remainder of the command line string and actions for
the target are executed. In this case, nothing is actually
removed from the command line string so that any previous or
neighbouring state may also have actionss.
actionss evaluation are ordered by the
tag−order style and specified tag by
_alternative. So, the various formats supported by
_alternative can be used in action.
descr is used for setting up the array parameter
expl.
/pattern/+
[%lookahead%]
[−guard]
[:tag:descr:action]
This is similar to
’/pattern/ ...’ but the
left part of the command line string is also considered as
part of the completion target.
/pattern/−
[%lookahead%]
[−guard]
[:tag:descr:action]
This is similar to
’/pattern/ ...’ but the
actions of the current and previous states are
ignored even if the following state’s
’pattern’ matches the empty string.
( spec
)
This groups specs.
|
spec # |
|
This allows any number of repetitions of
spec. |
spec spec
This represents the
concatenation of two specs.
spec |
spec
Either of the two specs
can be matched.
_requested [
−12VJ ] tag [ name descr [
command args ... ] ]
This function is called to
decide whether a tag already registered by a call to
_tags (see below) is requested and hence completion
should be performed for it; it returns status zero if the
tag is requested and non−zero otherwise. This will
usually be done in a loop such as the following:
_tags foo
bar baz
while _tags; do
if _requested foo; then
... # perform completion for foo
fi
... # test the tags bar and baz in the same way
... # exit loop if matches were generated
done
Note that the
test for whether matches were generated is not performed
until the end of the _tags loop. This is so that the
user can specify a set of tags to be tested at the same time
in the tag−order parameter.
If the
name and the descr are given,
_requested calls the _description function
with these arguments, including the options.
If the
command is given, the _all_labels function
will be called immediately with the same arguments. This is
often useful to do both the testing of the tag, getting the
description for the matches and adding the matches at once.
For example:
local expl
ret=1
_tags foo bar baz
while _tags; do
_requested foo expl ’description’ \
compadd foobar foobaz && ret=0
...
(( ret )) || break
done
Note that this
means that the command has to accept the options that
have to be passed down to compadd.
_retrieve_cache
cache_identifier
This function retrieves
completion information from the file given by
cache_identifier, stored in a directory specified by
the cache−path style (defaults to
~/.zsh/cache). The return value is zero if retrieval
was successful. It will only attempt retrieval if the
use−cache style is set, so you can call this
function without worrying about whether the user wanted to
use the caching layer.
See
_store_cache below for more details.
_sep_parts
This function is passed
alternating arrays and separators as arguments. The arrays
specify completions for parts of strings to be separated by
the separators. The arrays may be the names of array
parameters or a quoted list of words in parentheses. For
example, with the array ’hosts=(ftp
news)’ the call ’_sep_parts ’(foo
bar)’ @ hosts’ will complete the string
’f’ to ’foo’ and the
string ’b@n’ to
’bar@news’.
This function
passes the ’−V’,
’−J’,
’−1’,
’−2’,
’−n’,
’−X’,
’−M’,
’−P’,
’−S’,
’−r’,
’−R’, and
’−q’ options and their arguments to
the compadd builtin used to add the matches.
_setup tag [
group ]
This function expects a tag as
its argument and sets up the special parameters used by the
completion system appropriately for the tag, using styles
such as list−colors and
last−prompt.
The optional
group gives the name of the group in which the
matches will be placed. If it is not given, the tag
is used as the group name.
Note that this
function is called automatically from _description so
that one normally doesn’t have to call it
explicitly.
_store_cache
cache_identifier vars ...
This function, when combined
with _retrieve_cache and _cache_invalid, makes
it easy to implement a caching layer for your completion
functions. If a completion function needs to perform a
costly operation in order to generate data which is used to
calculate completions, you can store that data in variables,
and use this function to dump the values of those variables
to a file. Then, if they are needed in subsequent shell
invocations, they can be retrieved quickly from that file
via _retrieve_cache, avoiding the need for repeating
the costly operation.
The
cache_identifier specifies the file which the data
should be dumped to, and is stored in a directory specified
by the cache−path style (defaults to
~/.zsh/cache). The remaining vars arguments
are the variables to dump to the file.
The return
value is zero if storage was successful. The function will
only attempt storage if the use−cache style is
set, so you can call this function without worrying about
whether the user wanted to use the caching layer.
If your
completion function avoids calling _retrieve_cache when it
already has the completion data in the environment, it
should probably at least call _cache_invalid to check
whether this data and the data cached on disk is still
valid.
See the
_perl_modules completion function for a simple example of
usage of this caching layer.
_tags [ −C
name [ tags ... ] ]
If called with arguments, these
are taken as the names of the tags for the types of matches
the calling completion function can generate in the current
context. These tags are stored internally and sorted by
using the tag−order style. Following calls to
this function without arguments from the same function will
then select the first, second, etc. set of tags requested by
the user. To test if a certain tag should be tried, the
_requested function has to be called (see above).
The return
value is zero if at least one of the tags is requested and
non−zero otherwise.
This function
also accepts the −C option followed by a
name. This name is temporarily (i.e. not visible
outside _tags) stored in the argument field of the
context name in the curcontext parameter. This allows
_tags to be made to use a more specific context name
without having to change and reset the curcontext
parameter (which would otherwise have the same effect).
_values specs
...
This is used to complete values
(strings) and their arguments or lists of such values. It
can be used in two ways.
If the first
argument is the option ’−O
name’, this will be used in the same way as by
the _arguments function, in other words the elements
of the name array will be given to calls to
compadd and when executing an action.
Otherwise, if
the first argument (or the first argument after the
’−O name’ option if that is
used) is the option ’−s’, the next
argument is used as the character that separates multiple
values. Thus the values completed appear in the same word on
the command line, unlike completion using
_arguments.
The first
argument (after the options and separator character if they
are given) is used as a string to print as a description
before listing the values.
All other
arguments describe the possible values and their arguments
in the same format used for the description of options by
the _arguments function (see above). The only
differences are that no minus or plus sign is required at
the beginning, that values can have only one argument and
that those forms of actions beginning with an equal sign are
not supported.
The character
separating a value from its argument can be set using the
option −S (like −s, followed by
the character to use as the separator in the next argument).
If this option is not used, the equal sign will be used as
the separator.
Example:
_values
−s , ’description’ \
’*foo[bar]’ \
’(two)*one[number]:first count:’ \
’two[another number]::second count:(1 2
3)’
This describes
three possible values: ’foo’,
’one’, and ’two’. The
first is described as ’bar’, takes no
argument and may appear more than once. The second is
described as ’number’, may appear more
than once, and takes one mandatory argument described as
’first count’ for which no action is
specified so that it will not be completed automatically.
The ’(two)’ at the beginning says that if
the value ’one’ is on the line, the value
’two’ will not be considered to be a
possible completion anymore. Finally, the last value
(’two’) is described as ’another
number’ and takes an optional argument described
as ’second count’ which will be completed
from the strings ’1’,
’2’, and ’3’. The
_values function will complete lists of these values
separated by commas.
Like
_arguments this function temporarily adds another
context name component to the current context name while
executing the action. Here this name is just the name
of the value for which the argument is completed.
To decide if
the descriptions for the values (not those for the
arguments) should be printed, the style verbose is
used.
One last
difference from _arguments is that this function uses
the associative array val_args to report values and
their arguments, although otherwise this is the same as the
opt_args association used by _arguments. This
also means that the function calling _values should
declare the state, line, context and
val_args parameters as in:
local
context state line
typeset −A val_args
when using an
action of the form
’−>string’. With this
function the context parameter will be set to the
name of the value whose argument is to be completed.
Note also that
_values normally adds the character used as the
separator between values as an auto−removable suffix
so that users don’t have to type it themselves. But
when using a ’−>string’
action _values can’t do that because the
matches for the argument will be generated by the calling
function. To get the usual behaviour, the implementor of the
calling function has to add the suffix directly by passing
the options ’−qS x’ (where
x is the separator character specified with the
−s option of _values) to the function
generating the matches or to the compadd builtin.
Like
_arguments, _values supports the
−C option in which case you have to make the
parameter curcontext local instead of context
(as described above).
_wanted [
−C name ] [ −12VJ ] tag
name descr command args ...
In many contexts, completion
will generate one particular set of matches (usually
corresponding to a single tag); however, it is still
necessary to decide whether the user requires matches of
this type. This function is useful in such a case.
Like
_requested, it should be passed arguments as for
_description. It calls _tags with the given
tag and if that returns zero (so that the tag
is requested by the user) it calls _description.
Hence to offer only one tag and immediately use the
description generated:
_wanted tag
expl ’description’ \
compadd matches...
Unlike
_requested, however, _wanted cannot be called
without the command. This is because _wanted
also implements the loop over the tags, not just the one for
the labels; conversely, it should not be called in the
middle of a _tags loop.
Note that, as
for _requested, the command has to accept the
options that have to be passed down to compadd.
Like
_tags this function supports the −C
option to give a different name for the argument context
field.
COMPLETION DIRECTORIES
In the source
distribution, the files are contained in various
subdirectories of the Completion directory. They may
have been installed in the same structure, or into one
single function directory. The following is a description of
the files found in the original directory structure. If you
wish to alter an installed file, you will need to copy it to
some directory which appears earlier in your fpath
than the standard directory where it appears.
|
Base |
|
The core functions and special completion widgets
automatically bound to keys. You will certainly need most of
these, though will probably not need to alter them. Many of
these are documented above. |
|
Zsh |
|
Functions for completing arguments of shell builtin
commands and utility functions for this. Some of these are
also used by functions from the Unix directory. |
|
Unix |
|
Functions for completing arguments of external commands
and suites of commands. They may need modifying for your
system, although in many cases some attempt is made to
decide which version of a command is present. For example,
completion for the mount command tries to determine
the system it is running on, while completion for many other
utilities try to decide whether the GNU version of the
command is in use, and hence whether the
−−help option is supported.. |
X, AIX,
BSD, ...
Completion and utility function
for commands available only on some systems.
NAME
zshcompctl − zsh
programmable completion
SYNOPSIS
This version of
zsh has two ways of performing completion of words on the
command line. New users of the shell may prefer to use the
newer and more powerful system based on shell functions;
this is described in zshcompsys(1), and the basic
shell mechanisms which support it are described in
zshcompwid(1). This manual entry describes the older
compctl command.
DESCRIPTION
compctl
[ −CDT ] options [ command ... ]
compctl [ −CDT ] options [
−x pattern options − ...
−− ] [ + options [
−x ... −− ] ... [+] ] [
command ... ]
compctl −M match−specs ...
compctl −L [ −CDTM ] [ command
... ]
compctl + command ...
Control the
editor’s completion behavior according to the supplied
set of options. Various editing commands, notably
expand−or−complete−word, usually
bound to tab, will attempt to complete a word typed by the
user, while others, notably
delete−char−or−list, usually bound
to ^D in EMACS editing mode, list the possibilities;
compctl controls what those possibilities are. They
may for example be filenames (the most common case, and
hence the default), shell variables, or words from a
user−specified list.
COMMAND FLAGS
Completion of
the arguments of a command may be different for each command
or may use the default. The behavior when completing the
command word itself may also be separately specified. These
correspond to the following flags and arguments, all of
which (except for −L) may be combined with any
combination of the options described subsequently in
the section ’Option Flags’:
command ...
controls completion for the
named commands, which must be listed last on the command
line. If completion is attempted for a command with a
pathname containing slashes and no completion definition is
found, the search is retried with the last pathname
component. If the command starts with a =, completion
is tried with the pathname of the command.
Any of the
command strings may be patterns of the form normally
used for filename generation. These should be be quoted to
protect them from immediate expansion; for example the
command string ’foo*’ arranges for
completion of the words of any command beginning with
foo. When completion is attempted, all pattern
completions are tried in the reverse order of their
definition until one matches. By default, completion then
proceeds as normal, i.e. the shell will try to generate more
matches for the specific command on the command line; this
can be overridden by including −tn in the flags
for the pattern completion.
Note that
aliases are expanded before the command name is determined
unless the COMPLETE_ALIASES option is set. Commands
may not be combined with the −C,
−D or −T flags.
|
−C |
|
controls completion when the command word itself is
being completed. If no compctl −C command has
been issued, the names of any executable command (whether in
the path or specific to the shell, such as aliases or
functions) are completed. |
|
−D |
|
controls default completion behavior for the arguments
of commands not assigned any special behavior. If no
compctl −D command has been issued, filenames
are completed. |
|
−T |
|
supplies completion flags to be used before any other
processing is done, even before processing for
compctls defined for specific commands. This is
especially useful when combined with extended completion
(the −x flag, see the section ’Extended
Completion’ below). Using this flag you can define
default behavior which will apply to all commands without
exception, or you can alter the standard behavior for all
commands. For example, if your access to the user database
is too slow and/or it contains too many users (so that
completion after ’~’ is too slow to be
usable), you can use |
compctl
−T −x ’s[~] C[0,[^/]#]’ −k
friends −S/ −tn
to complete the
strings in the array friends after a
’~’. The C[...] argument is
necessary so that this form of ~−completion is not
tried after the directory name is finished.
|
−L |
|
lists the existing completion
behavior in a manner suitable for putting into a
start−up script; the existing behavior is not changed.
Any combination of the above forms, or the −M
flag (which must follow the −L flag), may be
specified, otherwise all defined completions are listed. Any
other flags supplied are ignored. |
no argument
If no argument is given,
compctl lists all defined completions in an
abbreviated form; with a list of options, all
completions with those flags set (not counting extended
completion) are listed.
If the +
flag is alone and followed immediately by the command
list, the completion behavior for all the commands in the
list is reset to the default. In other words, completion
will subsequently use the options specified by the
−D flag.
The form with
−M as the first and only option defines global
matching specifications (see zshcompwid). The match
specifications given will be used for every completion
attempt (only when using compctl, not with the new
completion system) and are tried in the order in which they
are defined until one generates at least one match.
E.g.:
compctl
−M ’’
’m:{a−zA−Z}={A−Za−z}’
This will first
try completion without any global match specifications (the
empty string) and, if that generates no matches, will try
case insensitive completion.
OPTION FLAGS
[
−fcFBdeaRGovNAIOPZEnbjrzu/12 ]
[ −k array ] [ −g
globstring ] [ −s subststring ]
[ −K function ]
[ −Q ] [ −P prefix ] [
−S suffix ]
[ −W file−prefix ] [
−H num pattern ]
[ −q ] [ −X explanation ] [
−Y explanation ]
[ −y func−or−var ] [
−l cmd ] [ −h cmd ]
[ −U ]
[ −t continue ] [ −J
name ] [ −V name ]
[ −M match−spec ]
The remaining
options specify the type of command arguments to look
for during completion. Any combination of these flags may be
specified; the result is a sorted list of all the
possibilities. The options are as follows.
Simple
Flags
These produce completion lists made up by the shell
itself:
|
−f |
|
Filenames and filesystem paths. |
|
−/ |
|
Just filesystem paths. |
|
−c |
|
Command names, including aliases, shell functions,
builtins and reserved words. |
|
−F |
|
Function names. |
|
−B |
|
Names of builtin commands. |
|
−m |
|
Names of external commands. |
|
−w |
|
Reserved words. |
|
−a |
|
Alias names. |
|
−R |
|
Names of regular (non−global) aliases. |
|
−G |
|
Names of global aliases. |
|
−d |
|
This can be combined with −F,
−B, −w, −a,
−R and −G to get names of disabled
functions, builtins, reserved words or aliases. |
|
−e |
|
This option (to show enabled commands) is in effect by
default, but may be combined with −d;
−de in combination with −F,
−B, −w, −a,
−R and −G will complete names of
functions, builtins, reserved words or aliases whether or
not they are disabled. |
|
−o |
|
Names of shell options (see zshoptions(1)). |
|
−v |
|
Names of any variable defined in the shell. |
|
−N |
|
Names of scalar (non−array) parameters. |
|
−A |
|
Array names. |
|
−I |
|
Names of integer variables. |
|
−O |
|
Names of read−only variables. |
|
−p |
|
Names of parameters used by the shell (including special
parameters). |
|
−Z |
|
Names of shell special parameters. |
|
−E |
|
Names of environment variables. |
|
−n |
|
Named directories. |
|
−b |
|
Key binding names. |
|
−j |
|
Job names: the first word of the job leader’s
command line. This is useful with the kill
builtin. |
|
−r |
|
Names of running jobs. |
|
−z |
|
Names of suspended jobs. |
|
−u |
|
User names. |
Flags with
Arguments
These have user supplied arguments to determine how the list
of completions is to be made up:
−k array
Names taken from the elements
of $array (note that the
’$’ does not appear on the command line).
Alternatively, the argument array itself may be a set
of space− or comma−separated values in
parentheses, in which any delimiter may be escaped with a
backslash; in this case the argument should be quoted. For
example,
compctl
−k "(cputime filesize datasize stacksize
|
|
coredumpsize resident descriptors)"
limit |
−g
globstring
The globstring is
expanded using filename globbing; it should be quoted to
protect it from immediate expansion. The resulting filenames
are taken as the possible completions. Use
’*(/)’ instead of ’*/’
for directories. The fignore special parameter is not
applied to the resulting files. More than one pattern may be
given separated by blanks. (Note that brace expansion is
not part of globbing. Use the syntax
’(either|or)’ to match alternatives.)
−s
subststring
The subststring is split
into words and these words are than expanded using all shell
expansion mechanisms (see zshexpn(1)). The resulting
words are taken as possible completions. The fignore
special parameter is not applied to the resulting files.
Note that −g is faster for filenames.
−K
function
Call the given function to get
the completions. Unless the name starts with an underscore,
the function is passed two arguments: the prefix and the
suffix of the word on which completion is to be attempted,
in other words those characters before the cursor position,
and those from the cursor position onwards. The whole
command line can be accessed with the −c and
−l flags of the read builtin. The
function should set the variable reply to an array
containing the completions (one completion per element);
note that reply should not be made local to the
function. From such a function the command line can be
accessed with the −c and −l flags
to the read builtin. For example,
function
whoson { reply=(’users’); }
compctl −K whoson talk
completes only
logged−on users after ’talk’. Note
that ’whoson’ must return an array, so
’reply=’users’’ would be
incorrect.
−H num
pattern
The possible completions are
taken from the last num history lines. Only words
matching pattern are taken. If num is zero or
negative the whole history is searched and if pattern
is the empty string all words are taken (as with
’*’). A typical use is
compctl
−D −f + −H 0 ’’
which forces
completion to look back in the history list for a word if no
filename matches.
Control
Flags
These do not directly specify types of name to be completed,
but manipulate the options that do:
|
−Q |
|
This instructs the shell not to quote any metacharacters
in the possible completions. Normally the results of a
completion are inserted into the command line with any
metacharacters quoted so that they are interpreted as normal
characters. This is appropriate for filenames and ordinary
strings. However, for special effects, such as inserting a
backquoted expression from a completion array
(−k) so that the expression will not be
evaluated until the complete line is executed, this option
must be used. |
−P
prefix
The prefix is inserted
just before the completed string; any initial part already
typed will be completed and the whole prefix ignored
for completion purposes. For example,
compctl
−j −P "%" kill
inserts a
’%’ after the kill command and then completes
job names.
−S
suffix
When a completion is found the
suffix is inserted after the completed string. In the
case of menu completion the suffix is inserted immediately,
but it is still possible to cycle through the list of
completions by repeatedly hitting the same key.
−W
file−prefix
With directory
file−prefix: for command, file, directory and
globbing completion (options −c,
−f, −/, −g), the file
prefix is implicitly added in front of the completion. For
example,
compctl
−/ −W ~/Mail maildirs
completes any
subdirectories to any depth beneath the directory
~/Mail, although that prefix does not appear on the
command line. The file−prefix may also be of
the form accepted by the −k flag, i.e. the name
of an array or a literal list in parenthesis. In this case
all the directories in the list will be searched for
possible completions.
|
−q |
|
If used with a suffix as specified by the
−S option, this causes the suffix to be removed
if the next character typed is a blank or does not insert
anything or if the suffix consists of only one character and
the next character typed is the same character; this the
same rule used for the AUTO_REMOVE_SLASH option. The
option is most useful for list separators (comma, colon,
etc.). |
|
−l cmd |
|
This option restricts the range of command line words
that are considered to be arguments. If combined with one of
the extended completion patterns
’p[...]’,
’r[...]’, or
’R[...]’ (see the section
’Extended Completion’ below) the range is
restricted to the range of arguments specified in the
brackets. Completion is then performed as if these had been
given as arguments to the cmd supplied with the
option. If the cmd string is empty the first word in
the range is instead taken as the command name, and command
name completion performed on the first word in the range.
For example, |
compctl
−x ’r[−exec,;]’ −l
’’ −− find
completes
arguments between ’−exec’ and the
following ’;’ (or the end of the command
line if there is no such string) as if they were a separate
command line.
|
−h cmd |
|
Normally zsh completes quoted
strings as a whole. With this option, completion can be done
separately on different parts of such strings. It works like
the −l option but makes the completion code
work on the parts of the current word that are separated by
spaces. These parts are completed as if they were arguments
to the given cmd. If cmd is the empty string,
the first part is completed as a command name, as with
−l. |
|
−U |
|
Use the whole list of possible completions, whether or
not they actually match the word on the command line. The
word typed so far will be deleted. This is most useful with
a function (given by the −K option) which can
examine the word components passed to it (or via the
read builtin’s −c and
−l flags) and use its own criteria to decide
what matches. If there is no completion, the original word
is retained. Since the produced possible completions seldom
have interesting common prefixes and suffixes, menu
completion is started immediately if AUTO_MENU is set
and this flag is used. |
−y
func−or−var
The list provided by
func−or−var is displayed instead of the
list of completions whenever a listing is required; the
actual completions to be inserted are not affected. It can
be provided in two ways. Firstly, if
func−or−var begins with a $ it
defines a variable, or if it begins with a left parenthesis
a literal array, which contains the list. A variable may
have been set by a call to a function using the
−K option. Otherwise it contains the name of a
function which will be executed to create the list. The
function will be passed as an argument list all matching
completions, including prefixes and suffixes expanded in
full, and should set the array reply to the result.
In both cases, the display list will only be retrieved after
a complete list of matches has been created.
Note that the
returned list does not have to correspond, even in length,
to the original set of matches, and may be passed as a
scalar instead of an array. No special formatting of
characters is performed on the output in this case; in
particular, newlines are printed literally and if they
appear output in columns is suppressed.
−X
explanation
Print explanation when
trying completion on the current set of options. A
’%n’ in this string is replaced by the
number of matches that were added for this explanation
string. The explanation only appears if completion was tried
and there was no unique match, or when listing completions.
Explanation strings will be listed together with the matches
of the group specified together with the −X
option (using the −J or −V
option). If the same explanation string is given to multiple
−X options, the string appears only once (for
each group) and the number of matches shown for the
’%n’ is the total number of all matches
for each of these uses. In any case, the explanation string
will only be shown if there was at least one match added for
the explanation string.
The sequences
%B, %b, %S, %s, %U, and
%u specify output attributes (bold, standout, and
underline) and %{...%} can be used to include literal
escape sequences as in prompts.
−Y
explanation
Identical to −X,
except that the explanation first undergoes expansion
following the usual rules for strings in double quotes. The
expansion will be carried out after any functions are called
for the −K or −y options, allowing
them to set variables.
−t
continue
The
continue−string contains a character that
specifies which set of completion flags should be used next.
It is useful:
(i) With
−T, or when trying a list of pattern
completions, when compctl would usually continue with
ordinary processing after finding matches; this can be
suppressed with ’−tn’.
(ii) With a
list of alternatives separated by +, when
compctl would normally stop when one of the
alternatives generates matches. It can be forced to consider
the next set of completions by adding
’−t+’ to the flags of the
alternative before the ’+’.
(iii) In an
extended completion list (see below), when compctl
would normally continue until a set of conditions succeeded,
then use only the immediately following flags. With
’−t−’, compctl will
continue trying extended completions after the next
’−’; with
’−tx’ it will attempt completion
with the default flags, in other words those before the
’−x’.
−J name
This gives the name of the
group the matches should be placed in. Groups are listed and
sorted separately; likewise, menu completion will offer the
matches in the groups in the order in which the groups were
defined. If no group name is explicitly given, the matches
are stored in a group named default. The first time a
group name is encountered, a group with that name is
created. After that all matches with the same group name are
stored in that group.
This can be
useful with non−exclusive alternative completions. For
example, in
compctl
−f −J files −t+ + −v −J
variables foo
both files and
variables are possible completions, as the −t+
forces both sets of alternatives before and after the
+ to be considered at once. Because of the
−J options, however, all files are listed
before all variables.
−V name
Like −J, but
matches within the group will not be sorted in listings nor
in menu completion. These unsorted groups are in a different
name space from the sorted ones, so groups defined as
−J files and −V files are
distinct.
|
−1 |
|
If given together with the −V option, makes
only consecutive duplicates in the group be removed. Note
that groups with and without this flag are in different name
spaces. |
|
−2 |
|
If given together with the −J or
−V option, makes all duplicates be kept. Again,
groups with and without this flag are in different name
spaces. |
−M
match−spec
This defines additional
matching control specifications that should be used only
when testing words for the list of flags this flag appears
in. The format of the match−spec string is
described in zshcompwid.
ALTERNATIVE COMPLETION
compctl
[ −CDT ] options + options
[ + ... ] [ + ] command ...
The form with
’+’ specifies alternative options.
Completion is tried with the options before the first
’+’. If this produces no matches
completion is tried with the flags after the
’+’ and so on. If there are no flags
after the last ’+’ and a match has not
been found up to that point, default completion is tried. If
the list of flags contains a −t with a +
character, the next list of flags is used even if the
current list produced matches.
EXTENDED COMPLETION
compctl
[ −CDT ] options −x
pattern options − ...
−−
[ command ... ]
compctl [
−CDT ] options [ −x
pattern options − ...
−− ]
[ + options [
−x ... −− ] ... [+] ]
[ command ... ]
The form with
’−x’ specifies extended completion
for the commands given; as shown, it may be combined with
alternative completion using ’+’. Each
pattern is examined in turn; when a match is found,
the corresponding options, as described in the
section ’Option Flags’ above, are used to
generate possible completions. If no pattern matches,
the options given before the −x are
used.
Note that each
pattern should be supplied as a single argument and should
be quoted to prevent expansion of metacharacters by the
shell.
A
pattern is built of sub−patterns separated by
commas; it matches if at least one of these
sub−patterns matches (they are ’or’ed).
These sub−patterns are in turn composed of other
sub−patterns separated by white spaces which match if
all of the sub−patterns match (they are
’and’ed). An element of the sub−patterns
is of the form
’c[...][...]’, where
the pairs of brackets may be repeated as often as necessary,
and matches if any of the sets of brackets match (an
’or’). The example below makes this clearer.
The elements
may be any of the following:
s[string]...
Matches if the current word on
the command line starts with one of the strings given in
brackets. The string is not removed and is not part
of the completion.
S[string]...
Like
s[string] except that the string
is part of the completion.
p[from,to]...
Matches if the number of the
current word is between one of the from and to
pairs inclusive. The comma and to are optional;
to defaults to the same value as from. The
numbers may be negative: −n refers to
the n’th last word on the line.
c[offset,string]...
Matches if the string
matches the word offset by offset from the current
word position. Usually offset will be negative.
C[offset,pattern]...
Like c but using pattern
matching instead.
w[index,string]...
Matches if the word in position
index is equal to the corresponding string.
Note that the word count is made after any alias
expansion.
W[index,pattern]...
Like w but using pattern
matching instead.
n[index,string]...
Matches if the current word
contains string. Anything up to and including the
indexth occurrence of this string will not be
considered part of the completion, but the rest will.
index may be negative to count from the end: in most
cases, index will be 1 or −1. For example,
compctl
−s ’’users’’ −x
’n[1,@]’ −k hosts −−
talk
will usually
complete usernames, but if you insert an @ after the
name, names from the array hosts (assumed to contain
hostnames, though you must make the array yourself) will be
completed. Other commands such as rcp can be handled
similarly.
N[index,string]...
Like n except that the
string will be taken as a character class. Anything up to
and including the indexth occurrence of any of the
characters in string will not be considered part of
the completion.
m[min,max]...
Matches if the total number of
words lies between min and max inclusive.
r[str1,str2]...
Matches if the cursor is after
a word with prefix str1. If there is also a word with
prefix str2 on the command line after the one matched
by str1 it matches only if the cursor is before this
word. If the comma and str2 are omitted, it matches
if the cursor is after a word with prefix str1.
R[str1,str2]...
Like r but using pattern
matching instead.
q[str]...
Matches the word currently
being completed is in single quotes and the str
begins with the letter ’s’, or if completion is
done in double quotes and str starts with the letter
’d’, or if completion is done in backticks and
str starts with a ’b’.
EXAMPLE
compctl
−u −x ’s[+]
c[−1,−f],s[−f+]’ \
−g ’~/Mail/*(:t)’ −
’s[−f],c[−1,−f]’ −f
−− mail
This is to be
interpreted as follows:
If the current
command is mail, then
if ((the
current word begins with + and the previous word is
−f)
or (the current word begins with −f+)), then
complete the
non−directory part (the ’:t’ glob
modifier) of files in the directory
~/Mail; else
if the current
word begins with −f or the previous word was
−f, then
complete any file; else
complete user
names.
NAME
zshmodules
− zsh loadable modules
DESCRIPTION
Some optional
parts of zsh are in modules, separate from the core of the
shell. Each of these modules may be linked in to the shell
at build time, or can be dynamically linked while the shell
is running if the installation supports this feature. The
modules that are bundled with the zsh distribution are:
zsh/cap
Builtins for manipulating
POSIX.1e (POSIX.6) capability (privilege) sets.
zsh/clone
A builtin that can clone a
running shell onto another terminal.
zsh/compctl
The compctl builtin for
controlling completion.
zsh/complete
The basic completion code.
zsh/complist
Completion listing
extensions.
zsh/computil
A module with utility builtins
needed for the shell function based completion system.
zsh/deltochar
A ZLE function duplicating
EMACS’ zap−to−char.
zsh/example
An example of how to write a
module.
zsh/files
Some basic file manipulation
commands as builtins.
zsh/mapfile
Access to external files via a
special associative array.
zsh/mathfunc
Standard scientific functions
for use in mathematical evaluations.
zsh/parameter
Access to internal hash tables
via special associative arrays.
zsh/sched
A builtin that provides a timed
execution facility within the shell.
zsh/stat
A builtin command interface to
the stat system call.
zsh/termcap
Interface to the termcap
database.
zsh/terminfo
Interface to the terminfo
database.
zsh/zftp
A builtin FTP client.
zsh/zle
The Zsh Line Editor, including
the bindkey and vared builtins.
zsh/zleparameter
Access to internals of the Zsh
Line Editor via parameters.
zsh/zprof
A module allowing profiling for
shell functions.
zsh/zpty
A builtin for starting a
command in a pseudo−terminal.
zsh/zutil
Some utility builtins, e.g. the
one for supporting configuration via styles.
THE ZSH/CAP MODULE
The
zsh/cap module is used for manipulating POSIX.1e
(POSIX.6) capability sets. If the operating system does not
support this interface, the builtins defined by this module
will do nothing. The builtins in this module are:
cap [ capabilities ]
Change the shell’s
process capability sets to the specified
capabilities, otherwise display the shell’s
current capabilities.
getcap filename
...
This is a built−in
implementation of the POSIX standard utility. It displays
the capability sets on each specified filename.
setcap capabilities
filename ...
This is a built−in
implementation of the POSIX standard utility. It sets the
capability sets on each specified filename to the
specified capabilities.
THE ZSH/CLONE MODULE
The
zsh/clone module makes available one builtin command:
clone tty
Creates a forked instance of
the current shell, attached to the specified tty. In
the new shell, the PID, PPID and TTY
special parameters are changed appropriately. $! is
set to zero in the new shell, and to the new shell’s
PID in the original shell.
The return
value of the builtin is zero in both shells if successful,
and non−zero on error.
THE ZSH/COMPCTL MODULE
The
zsh/compctl module makes available two builtin
commands. compctl, is the old, deprecated way to
control completions for ZLE. See zshcompctl(1). The
other builtin command, compcall can be used in
user−defined completion widgets, see
zshcompwid(1).
THE ZSH/COMPLETE MODULE
The
zsh/complete module makes available several builtin
commands which can be used in user−defined completion
widgets, see zshcompwid(1).
THE ZSH/COMPLIST MODULE
The
zsh/complist module offers three extensions to
completion listings: the ability to highlight matches in
such a list, the ability to scroll through long lists and a
different style of menu completion.
Colored
completion listings
Whenever one of the parameters ZLS_COLORS or
ZLS_COLOURS is set and the zsh/complist module
is loaded or linked into the shell, completion lists will be
colored. Note, however, that complist will not
automatically be loaded if it is not linked in: on systems
with dynamic loading, ’zmodload
zsh/complist’ is required.
The parameters
ZLS_COLORS and ZLS_COLOURS describe how
matches are highlighted. To turn on highlighting an empty
value suffices, in which case all the default values given
below will be used. The format of the value of these
parameters is the same as used by the GNU version of the
ls command: a colon−separated list of
specifications of the form
’name=value’. The name may
be one of the following strings, most of which specify file
types for which the value will be used. The strings
and their default values are:
|
no 0 |
|
for normal text (i.e. when displaying something other
than a matched file) |
|
fi 0 |
|
for regular files |
|
di 32 |
|
for directories |
|
ln 36 |
|
for symbolic links |
|
pi 31 |
|
for named pipes (FIFOs) |
|
so 33 |
|
for sockets |
bd 44;37
for block devices
cd 44;37
for character devices
|
ex 35 |
|
for executable files |
|
mi none
for a non−existent file
(default is the value defined for fi)
|
lc \e[ |
|
for the left code (see below) |
|
rc m |
|
for the right code |
|
tc 0 |
|
for the character indicating the file type printed after
filenames if the LIST_TYPES option is set |
|
sp 0 |
|
for the spaces printed after matches to align the next
column |
ec none
for the end code
Apart from
these strings, the name may also be an asterisk
(’*’) followed by any string. The
value given for such a string will be used for all
files whose name ends with the string. The name may
also be an equals sign (’=’) followed by
a pattern. The value given for this pattern will be
used for all matches (not just filenames) whose display
string are matched by the pattern. Definitions for both of
these take precedence over the values defined for file types
and the form with the leading asterisk takes precedence over
the form with the leading equal sign.
The last form
also allows different parts of the displayed strings to be
colored differently. For this, the pattern has to use the
’(#b)’ globbing flag and pairs of
parentheses surrounding the parts of the strings that are to
be colored differently. In this case the value may
consist of more than one color code separated by equal
signs. The first code will be used for all parts for which
no explicit code is specified and the following codes will
be used for the parts matched by the sub−patterns in
parentheses. For example, the specification
’=(#b)(?)*(?)=0=3=7’ will be used for all
matches which are at least two characters long and will use
the code ’3’ for the first character,
’7’ for the last character and
’0’ for the rest.
All three forms
of name may be preceded by a pattern in parentheses.
If this is given, the value will be used only for
matches in groups whose names are matched by the pattern
given in the parentheses. For example,
’(g*)m*=43’ highlights all matches
beginning with ’m’ in groups whose names
begin with ’g’ using the color code
’43’. In case of the
’lc’, ’rc’, and
’ec’ codes, the group pattern is
ignored.
Note also that
all patterns are tried in the order in which they appear in
the parameter value until the first one matches which is
then used.
When printing a
match, the code prints the value of lc, the value for
the file−type or the last matching specification with
a ’*’, the value of rc, the string
to display for the match itself, and then the value of
ec if that is defined or the values of lc,
no, and rc if ec is not defined.
The default
values are ISO 6429 (ANSI) compliant and can be used on
vt100 compatible terminals such as xterms. On
monochrome terminals the default values will have no visible
effect. The colors function from the contribution can
be used to get associative arrays containing the codes for
ANSI terminals (see the section ’Other
Functions’ in zshcontrib(1)). For example,
after loading colors, one could use
’$colors[red]’ to get the code for
foreground color red and
’$colors[bg−green]’ for the code
for background color green.
If the
completion system invoked by compinit is used, these
parameters should not be set directly because the system
controls them itself. Instead, the list−colors
style should be used (see the section ’Completion
System Configuration’ in zshcompsys(1)).
Scrolling in
completion listings
To enable scrolling through a completion list, the
LISTPROMPT parameter must be set. Its value will be
used as the prompt; if it is the empty string, a default
prompt will be used. The value may contain escapes of the
form ’%x’. It supports the escapes
’%B’, ’%b’,
’%S’, ’%s’,
’%U’, ’%u’ and
’%{...%}’ used also in shell prompts as
well as three pairs of additional sequences: a
’%l’ or ’%L’ is
replaced by the number of the last line shown and the total
number of lines in the form
’number/total’; a
’%m’ or ’%M’ is
replaced with the number of the last match shown and the
total number of matches; and ’%p’ or
’%P’ is replaced with
’Top’, ’Bottom’ or the
position of the first line shown in percent of the total
number of lines, respectively. In each of these cases the
form with the uppercase letter will be replaced with a
string of fixed width, padded to the right with spaces,
while the lowercase form will not be padded.
If the
parameter LISTPROMPT is set, the completion code will
not ask if the list should be shown. Instead it immediately
starts displaying the list, stopping after the first
screenful, showing the prompt at the bottom, waiting for a
keypress after temporarily switching to the
listscroll keymap. Some of the zle functions have a
special meaning while scrolling lists:
send−break
stops listing discarding the
key pressed
accept−line,
down−history,
down−line−or−history
down−line−or−search,
vi−down−line−or−history
scrolls forward one line
complete−word,
menu−complete,
expand−or−complete
expand−or−complete−prefix,
menu−complete−or−expand
scrolls forward one
screenful
Every other
character stops listing and immediately processes the key as
usual. Any key that is not bound in the listscroll
keymap or that is bound to undefined−key is
looked up in the keymap currently selected.
As for the
ZLS_COLORS and ZLS_COLOURS parameters,
LISTPROMPT should not be set directly when using the
shell function based completion system. Instead, the
list−prompt style should be used.
Menu
selection
The zsh/complist module also offers an alternative
style of selecting matches from a list, called menu
selection, which can be used if the shell is set up to
return to the last prompt after showing a completion list
(see the ALWAYS_LAST_PROMPT option in
zshoptions(1)). It can be invoked directly by the
widget menu−select defined by the module.
Alternatively, the parameter MENUSELECT can be set to
an integer, which gives the minimum number of matches that
must be present before menu selection is automatically
turned on. This second method requires that menu completion
be started, either directly from a widget such as
menu−complete, or due to one of the options
MENU_COMPLETE or AUTO_MENU being set. If
MENUSELECT is set, but is 0, 1 or empty, menu
selection will always be started during an ambiguous menu
completion.
When using the
completion system based on shell functions, the
MENUSELECT parameter should not be used (like the
ZLS_COLORS and ZLS_COLOURS parameters
described above). Instead, the menu style should be
used with the select=... keyword.
After menu
selection is started, the matches will be listed. If there
are more matches than fit on the screen, only the first
screenful is shown. The matches to insert into the command
line can be selected from this list. In the list one match
is highlighted using the value for ma from the
ZLS_COLORS or ZLS_COLOURS parameter. The
default value for this is ’7’ which
forces the selected match to be highlighted using standout
mode on a vt100−compatible terminal. If neither
ZLS_COLORS nor ZLS_COLOURS is set, the same
terminal control sequence as for the ’%S’
escape in prompts is used.
If there are
more matches than fit on the screen and the parameter
MENUPROMPT is set, its value will be shown below the
matches. It supports the same escape sequences as
LISTPROMPT, but the number of the match or line shown
will be that of the one where the mark is placed. If its
value is the empty string, a default prompt will be
used.
The
MENUSCROLL parameter can be used to specify how the
list is scrolled. If the parameter is unset, this is done
line by line, if it is set to ’0’ (zero),
the list will scroll half the number of lines of the screen.
If the value is positive, it gives the number of lines to
scroll and if it is negative, the list will be scrolled the
number of lines of the screen minus the (absolute)
value.
As for the
ZLS_COLORS, ZLS_COLOURS and LISTPROMPT
parameters, neither MENUPROMPT nor MENUSCROLL
should be set directly when using the shell function based
completion system. Instead, the select−prompt
and select−scroll styles should be used.
The completion
code sometimes decides not to show all of the matches in the
list. These hidden matches are either matches for which the
completion function which added them explicitly requested
that they not appear in the list (using the −n
option of the compadd builtin command) or they are
matches which duplicate a string already in the list
(because they differ only in things like prefixes or
suffixes that are not displayed). In the list used for menu
selection, however, even these matches are shown so that it
is possible to select them. To highlight such matches the
hi and du capabilities in the
ZLS_COLORS and ZLS_COLOURS parameters are
supported for hidden matches of the first and second kind,
respectively.
Selecting
matches is done by moving the mark around using the zle
movement functions. When not all matches can be shown on the
screen at the same time, the list will scroll up and down
when crossing the top or bottom line. The following zle
functions have special meaning during menu selection:
accept−line
accepts the current match and
leaves menu selection
send−break
leaves menu selection and
restores the previous contents of the command line
redisplay,
clear−screen
execute their normal function
without leaving menu selection
accept−and−hold,
accept−and−menu−complete
accept the currently inserted
match and continue selection allowing to select the next
match to insert into the line
accept−and−infer−next−history
accepts the current match and
then tries completion with menu selection again; in the case
of files this allows one to select a directory and
immediately attempt to complete files in it; if there are no
matches, a message is shown and one can use undo to
go back to completion on the previous level, every other key
leaves menu selection (including the other zle functions
which are otherwise special during menu selection)
|
undo |
|
removes matches inserted during the menu selection by
one of the three functions before |
down−history,
down−line−or−history
vi−down−line−or−history,
down−line−or−search
moves the mark one line
down
up−history,
up−line−or−history
vi−up−line−or−history,
up−line−or−search
moves the mark one line up
forward−char,
vi−forward−char
moves the mark one column
right
backward−char,
vi−backward−char
moves the mark one column
left
forward−word,
vi−forward−word
vi−forward−word−end,
emacs−forward−word
moves the mark one screenful
down
backward−word,
vi−backward−word,
emacs−backward−word
moves the mark one screenful
up
vi−forward−blank−word,
vi−forward−blank−word−end
moves the mark to the first
line of the next group of matches
vi−backward−blank−word
moves the mark to the last line
of the previous group of matches
beginning−of−history
moves the mark to the first
line
end−of−history
moves the mark to the last
line
beginning−of−buffer−or−history,
beginning−of−line
beginning−of−line−hist,
vi−beginning−of−line
moves the mark to the leftmost
column
end−of−buffer−or−history,
end−of−line
end−of−line−hist,
vi−end−of−line
moves the mark to the rightmost
column
complete−word,
menu−complete,
expand−or−complete
expand−or−complete−prefix,
menu−expand−or−complete
moves the mark to the next
match
reverse−menu−complete
moves the mark to the previous
match
All movement
functions wrap around at the edges; any other zle function
not listed leaves menu selection and executes that function.
It is possible to make widgets in the above list do the same
by using the form of the widget with a
’.’ in front. For example, the widget
’.accept−line’ has the effect of
leaving menu selection and accepting the entire command
line.
During this
selection the widget uses the keymap menuselect. Any
key that is not defined in this keymap or that is bound to
undefined−key is looked up in the keymap
currently selected. This is used to ensure that the most
important keys used during selection (namely the cursor
keys, return, and TAB) have sensible defaults. However, keys
in the menuselect keymap can be modified directly
using the bindkey builtin command (see
zshmodules(1)). For example, to make the return key
leave menu selection without accepting the match currently
selected one could call
bindkey
−M menuselect ’^M’
send−break
after loading
the zsh/complist module.
THE ZSH/COMPUTIL MODULE
The
zsh/computil module adds several builtin commands
that are used by some of the completion functions in the
completion system based on shell functions (see
zshcompsys(1) ). Except for compquote these
builtin commands are very specialised and thus not very
interesting when writing your own completion functions. In
summary, these builtin commands are:
comparguments
This is used by the
_arguments function to do the argument and command
line parsing. Like compdescribe it has an option
−i to do the parsing and initialize some
internal state and various options to access the state
information to decide what should be completed.
compdescribe
This is used by the
_describe function to build the displays for the
matches and to get the strings to add as matches with their
options. On the first call one of the options
−i or −I should be supplied as the
first argument. In the first case, display strings without
the descriptions will be generated, in the second case, the
string used to separate the matches from their descriptions
must be given as the second argument and the descriptions
(if any) will be shown. All other arguments are like the
definition arguments to _describe itself.
Once
compdescribe has been called with either the
−i or the −I option, it can be
repeatedly called with the −g option and the
names of five arrays as its arguments. This will step
through the different sets of matches and store the options
in the first array, the strings with descriptions in the
second, the matches for these in the third, the strings
without descriptions in the fourth, and the matches for them
in the fifth array. These are then directly given to
compadd to register the matches with the completion
code.
compfiles
Used by the _path_files
function to optimize complex recursive filename generation
(globbing). It does three things. With the −p
and −P options it builds the glob patterns to
use, including the paths already handled and trying to
optimize the patterns with respect to the prefix and suffix
from the line and the match specification currently used.
The −i option does the directory tests for the
ignore−parents style and the −r
option tests if a component for some of the matches are
equal to the string on the line and removes all other
matches if that is true.
compgroups
Used by the _tags
function to implement the internals of the
group−order style. This only takes its
arguments as names of completion groups and creates the
groups for it (all six types: sorted and unsorted, both
without removing duplicates, with removing all duplicates
and with removing consecutive duplicates).
compquote [
−p ] names ...
There may be reasons to write
completion functions that have to add the matches using the
−Q option to compadd and perform quoting
themselves. Instead of interpreting the first character of
the all_quotes key of the compstate special
association and using the q flag for parameter
expansions, one can use this builtin command. The arguments
are the names of scalar or array parameters and the values
of these parameters are quoted as needed for the innermost
quoting level. If the −p option is given,
quoting is done as if there is some prefix before the values
of the parameters, so that a leading equal sign will not be
quoted.
The return
value is non−zero in case of an error and zero
otherwise.
comptags
comptry
These implement the internals
of the tags mechanism.
compvalues
Like comparguments, but
for the _values function.
THE ZSH/DELTOCHAR MODULE
The
zsh/deltochar module makes available two ZLE
functions:
delete−to−char
Read a character from the
keyboard, and delete from the cursor position up to and
including the next (or, with repeat count n, the
nth) instance of that character. Negative repeat
counts mean delete backwards.
zap−to−char
This behaves like
delete−to−char, except that the final
occurrence of the character itself is not deleted.
THE ZSH/EXAMPLE MODULE
The
zsh/example module makes available one builtin
command:
example [ −flags ] [ args ... ]
Displays the flags and
arguments it is invoked with.
The purpose of
the module is to serve as an example of how to write a
module.
THE ZSH/FILES MODULE
The
zsh/files module makes some standard commands
available as builtins:
chgrp [ −Rs ] group filename ...
Changes group of files
specified. This is equivalent to chown with a
user−spec argument of
’:group’.
chown [ −Rs
] user−spec filename ...
Changes ownership and group of
files specified.
The
user−spec can be in four forms:
|
user |
|
change owner to user; do not change group |
|
user:: |
|
change owner to user; do not change group |
|
user: |
|
change owner to user; change group to
user’s primary group |
user:group
change owner to user;
change group to group
|
:group |
|
do not change owner; change group to group |
|
In each case,
the ’:’ may instead be a
’.’. The rule is that if there is a
’:’ then the separator is
’:’, otherwise if there is a
’.’ then the separator is
’.’, otherwise there is no separator.
Each of
user and group may be either a username (or
group name, as appropriate) or a decimal user ID (group ID).
Interpretation as a name takes precedence, if there is an
all−numeric username (or group name).
The
−R option causes chown to recursively
descend into directories, changing the ownership of all
files in the directory after changing the ownership of the
directory itself.
The
−s option is a zsh extension to chown
functionality. It enables paranoid behaviour, intended to
avoid security problems involving a chown being
tricked into affecting files other than the ones intended.
It will refuse to follow symbolic links, so that (for
example) ’’chown luser
/tmp/foo/passwd’’ can’t accidentally
chown /etc/passwd if /tmp/foo happens to be a
link to /etc. It will also check where it is after
leaving directories, so that a recursive chown of a deep
directory tree can’t end up recursively chowning
/usr as a result of directories being moved up the
tree.
ln [ −dfis
] filename dest
ln [ −dfis ] filename ...
dir
Creates hard (or, with
−s, symbolic) links. In the first form, the
specified destination is created, as a link to the
specified filename. In the second form, each of the
filenames is taken in turn, and linked to a pathname
in the specified directory that has the same last
pathname component.
Normally,
ln will not attempt to create hard links to
directories. This check can be overridden using the
−d option. Typically only the super−user
can actually succeed in creating hard links to directories.
This does not apply to symbolic links in any case.
By default,
existing files cannot be replaced by links. The
−i option causes the user to be queried about
replacing existing files. The −f option causes
existing files to be silently deleted, without querying.
−f takes precedence.
mkdir [ −p
] [ −m mode ] dir ...
Creates directories. With the
−p option, non−existing parent
directories are first created if necessary, and there will
be no complaint if the directory already exists. The
−m option can be used to specify (in octal) a
set of file permissions for the created directories,
otherwise mode 777 modified by the current umask (see
umask(2)) is used.
mv [ −fi ]
filename dest
mv [ −fi ] filename ...
dir
Moves files. In the first form,
the specified filename is moved to the specified
destination. In the second form, each of the
filenames is taken in turn, and moved to a pathname
in the specified directory that has the same last
pathname component.
By default, the
user will be queried before replacing any file that the user
cannot write to, but writable files will be silently
removed. The −i option causes the user to be
queried about replacing any existing files. The
−f option causes any existing files to be
silently deleted, without querying. −f takes
precedence.
Note that this
mv will not move files across devices. Historical
versions of mv, when actual renaming is impossible,
fall back on copying and removing files; if this behaviour
is desired, use cp and rm manually. This may
change in a future version.
rm [ −dfirs
] filename ...
Removes files and directories
specified.
Normally,
rm will not remove directories (except with the
−r option). The −d option causes
rm to try removing directories with unlink
(see unlink(2)), the same method used for files.
Typically only the super−user can actually succeed in
unlinking directories in this way. −d takes
precedence over −r.
By default, the
user will be queried before removing any file that the user
cannot write to, but writable files will be silently
removed. The −i option causes the user to be
queried about removing any files. The −f option
causes files to be silently deleted, without querying, and
suppresses all error indications. −f takes
precedence.
The
−r option causes rm to recursively
descend into directories, deleting all files in the
directory before removing the directory with the
rmdir system call (see rmdir(2)).
The
−s option is a zsh extension to rm
functionality. It enables paranoid behaviour, intended to
avoid common security problems involving a root−run
rm being tricked into removing files other than the
ones intended. It will refuse to follow symbolic links, so
that (for example) ’’rm
/tmp/foo/passwd’’ can’t accidentally
remove /etc/passwd if /tmp/foo happens to be a
link to /etc. It will also check where it is after
leaving directories, so that a recursive removal of a deep
directory tree can’t end up recursively removing
/usr as a result of directories being moved up the
tree.
rmdir dir ...
Removes empty directories
specified.
|
sync |
|
Calls the system call of the same name (see
sync(2)), which flushes dirty buffers to disk. It
might return before the I/O has actually been completed. |
THE ZSH/MAPFILE MODULE
The
zsh/mapfile module provides one special associative
array parameter of the same name.
mapfile
This associative array takes as
keys the names of files; the resulting value is the content
of the file. The value is treated identically to any other
text coming from a parameter. The value may also be assigned
to, in which case the file in question is written (whether
or not it originally existed); or an element may be unset,
which will delete the file in question. For example,
’vared mapfile[myfile]’ works as
expected, editing the file ’myfile’.
When the array
is accessed as a whole, the keys are the names of files in
the current directory, and the values are empty (to save a
huge overhead in memory). Thus ${(k)mapfile} has the
same affect as the glob operator *(D), since files
beginning with a dot are not special. Care must be taken
with expressions such as rm ${(k)mapfile}, which will
delete every file in the current directory without the usual
’rm *’ test.
The parameter
mapfile may be made read−only; in that case,
files referenced may not be written or deleted.
Limitations
Although reading and writing of the file in question is
efficiently handled, zsh’s internal memory management
may be arbitrarily baroque. Thus it should not automatically
be assumed that use of mapfile represents a gain in
efficiency over use of other mechanisms. Note in particular
that the whole contents of the file will always reside
physically in memory when accessed (possibly multiple times,
due to standard parameter substitution operations). In
particular, this means handling of sufficiently long files
(greater than the machine’s swap space, or than the
range of the pointer type) will be incorrect.
No errors are
printed or flagged for non−existent, unreadable, or
unwritable files, as the parameter mechanism is too low in
the shell execution hierarchy to make this convenient.
It is
unfortunate that the mechanism for loading modules does not
yet allow the user to specify the name of the shell
parameter to be given the special behaviour.
THE ZSH/MATHFUNC MODULE
The
zsh/mathfunc module provides standard mathematical
functions for use when evaluating mathematical formulae. The
syntax agrees with normal C and FORTRAN conventions, for
example,
(( f =
sin(0.3) ))
assigns the
sine of 0.3 to the parameter f.
Most functions
take floating point arguments and return a floating point
value. However, any necessary conversions from or to integer
type will be performed automatically by the shell. Apart
from atan with a second argument and the abs,
int and float functions, all functions behave
as noted in the manual page for the corresponding C
function, except that any arguments out of range for the
function in question will be detected by the shell and an
error reported.
The following
functions take a single floating point argument:
acos, acosh, asin, asinh,
atan, atanh, cbrt, ceil,
cos, cosh, erf, erfc,
exp, expm1, fabs, floor,
gamma, j0, j1, lgamma,
log, log10, log1p, logb,
sin, sinh, sqrt, tan,
tanh, y0, y1. The atan function
can optionally take a second argument, in which case it
behaves like the C function atan2. The ilogb
function takes a single floating point argument, but returns
an integer.
The function
signgam takes no arguments, and returns an integer,
which is the C variable of the same name, as described in
gamma(3). Note that it is therefore only useful
immediately after a call to gamma or lgamma.
Note also that ’signgam()’ and
’signgam’ are distinct expressions.
The following
functions take two floating point arguments:
copysign, fmod, hypot,
nextafter.
The following
take an integer first argument and a floating point second
argument: jn, yn.
The following
take a floating point first argument and an integer second
argument: ldexp, scalb.
The function
abs does not convert the type of its single argument;
it returns the absolute value of either a floating point
number or an integer. The functions float and
int convert their arguments into a floating point or
integer value (by truncation) respectively.
Note that the C
pow function is available in ordinary math evaluation
as the ’**’ operator and is not provided
here.
THE ZSH/PARAMETER MODULE
The
zsh/parameter module gives access to some of the
internal hash tables used by the shell by defining some
special parameters.
options
The keys for this associative
array are the names of the options that can be set and unset
using the setopt and unsetopt builtins. The
value of each key is either the string on if the
option is currently set, or the string off if the
option is unset. Setting a key to one of these strings is
like setting or unsetting the option, respectively.
Unsetting a key in this array is like setting it to the
value off.
commands
This array gives access to the
command hash table. The keys are the names of external
commands, the values are the pathnames of the files that
would be executed when the command would be invoked. Setting
a key in this array defines a new entry in this table in the
same way as with the hash builtin. Unsetting a key as
in ’unset "commands[foo]"’
removes the entry for the given key from the command hash
table.
functions
This associative array maps
names of enabled functions to their definitions. Setting a
key in it is like defining a function with the name given by
the key and the body given by the value. Unsetting a key
removes the definition for the function named by the
key.
dis_functions
Like functions but for
disabled functions.
builtins
This associative array gives
information about the builtin commands currently enabled.
The keys are the names of the builtin commands and the
values are either ’undefined’ for builtin
commands that will automatically be loaded from a module if
invoked or ’defined’ for builtin commands
that are already loaded.
dis_builtins
Like builtins but for
disabled builtin commands.
reswords
This array contains the enabled
reserved words.
dis_reswords
Like reswords but for
disabled reserved words.
aliases
This maps the names of the
regular aliases currently enabled to their expansions.
dis_aliases
Like raliases but for
disabled regular aliases.
galiases
Like raliases, but for
global aliases.
dis_galiases
Like galiases but for
disabled global aliases.
parameters
The keys in this associative
array are the names of the parameters currently defined. The
values are strings describing the type of the parameter, in
the same format used by the t parameter flag, see
zshexpn(1) . Setting or unsetting keys in this array
is not possible.
modules
An associative array giving
information about modules. The keys are the names of the
modules loaded, registered to be autoloaded, or aliased. The
value says which state the named module is in and is one of
the strings ’loaded’,
’autoloaded’, or
’alias:name’, where name is
the name the module is aliased to.
Setting or
unsetting keys in this array is not possible.
dirstack
A normal array holding the
elements of the directory stack. Note that the output of the
dirs builtin command includes one more directory, the
current working directory.
history
This associative array maps
history event numbers to the full history lines.
historywords
A special array containing the
words stored in the history.
jobdirs
This associative array maps job
numbers to the directories from which the job was started
(which may not be the current directory of the job).
jobtexts
This associative array maps job
numbers to the texts of the command lines that were used to
start the jobs.
jobstates
This associative array gives
information about the states of the jobs currently known.
The keys are the job numbers and the values are strings of
the form
’job−state:mark:pid=state...’.
The job−state gives the state the whole job is
currently in, one of ’running’,
’suspended’, or
’done’. The mark is
’+’ for the current job,
’−’ for the previous job and empty
otherwise. This is followed by one
’pid=state’ for every
process in the job. The pids are, of course, the
process IDs and the state describes the state of that
process.
nameddirs
This associative array maps the
names of named directories to the pathnames they stand
for.
userdirs
This associative array maps
user names to the pathnames of their home directories.
funcstack
This array contains the names
of the functions currently being executed. The first element
is the name of the function using the parameter.
THE ZSH/SCHED MODULE
The
zsh/sched module makes available one builtin command:
sched [+]hh:mm command ...
sched [ −item ]
Make an entry in the scheduled
list of commands to execute. The time may be specified in
either absolute or relative time. With no arguments, prints
the list of scheduled commands. With the argument
’−item’, removes the given
item from the list.
THE ZSH/STAT MODULE
The
zsh/stat module makes available one builtin command:
stat [ −gnNolLtTrs ] [ −f
fd ] [ −H hash ] [
−A array ] [ −F fmt
] [
+element ] [ file ... ]
The command acts as a front end
to the stat system call (see stat(2)). If the
stat call fails, the appropriate system error message
printed and status 1 is returned. The fields of struct
stat give information about the files provided as
arguments to the command. In addition to those available
from the stat call, an extra element
’link’ is provided. These elements
are:
|
device |
|
The number of the device on which the file resides. |
|
inode |
|
The unique number of the file on this device
(’inode’ number). |
|
mode |
|
The mode of the file; that is, the file’s type and
access permissions. With the −s option, this
will be returned as a string corresponding to the first
column in the display of the ls −l command. |
|
nlink |
|
The number of hard links to the file. |
|
uid |
|
The user ID of the owner of the file. With the
−s option, this is displayed as a user
name. |
|
gid |
|
The group ID of the file. With the −s
option, this is displayed as a group name. |
|
rdev |
|
The raw device number. This is only useful for special
devices. |
|
size |
|
The size of the file in bytes. |
|
atime |
|
|
|
mtime |
|
|
|
ctime |
|
The last access, modification and inode change times of
the file, respectively, as the number of seconds since
midnight GMT on 1st January, 1970. With the −s
option, these are printed as strings for the local time
zone; the format can be altered with the −F
option, and with the −g option the times are in
GMT. |
blksize
The number of bytes in one
allocation block on the device on which the file
resides.
|
block |
|
The number of disk blocks used by the file. |
|
link |
|
If the file is a link and the −L option is
in effect, this contains the name of the file linked to,
otherwise it is empty. Note that if this element is selected
(’’stat +link’’) then the
−L option is automatically used. |
A particular
element may be selected by including its name preceded by a
’+’ in the option list; only one element
is allowed. The element may be shortened to any unique set
of leading characters. Otherwise, all elements will be shown
for all files.
Options:
−A array
Instead of displaying the
results on standard output, assign them to an array,
one struct stat element per array element for each
file in order. In this case neither the name of the element
nor the name of the files appears in array unless the
−t or −n options were given,
respectively. If −t is given, the element name
appears as a prefix to the appropriate array element; if
−n is given, the file name appears as a
separate array element preceding all the others. Other
formatting options are respected.
−H hash
Similar to −A, but
instead assign the values to hash. The keys are the
elements listed above. If the −n option is
provided then the name of the file is included in the hash
with key name.
|
−f fd |
|
Use the file on file descriptor fd instead of
named files; no list of file names is allowed in this
case. |
|
−F fmt |
|
Supplies a strftime (see strftime(3))
string for the formatting of the time elements. The
−s option is implied. |
|
−g |
|
Show the time elements in the GMT time zone. The
−s option is implied. |
|
−l |
|
List the names of the type elements (to standard output
or an array as appropriate) and return immediately; options
other than −A and arguments are ignored. |
|
−L |
|
Perform an lstat (see lstat(2)) rather
than a stat system call. In this case, if the file is
a link, information about the link itself rather than the
target file is returned. This option is required to make the
link element useful. |
|
−n |
|
Always show the names of files. Usually these are only
shown when output is to standard output and there is more
than one file in the list. |
|
−N |
|
Never show the names of files. |
|
−o |
|
If a raw file mode is printed, show it in octal, which
is more useful for human consumption than the default of
decimal. A leading zero will be printed in this case. Note
that this does not affect whether a raw or formatted file
mode is shown, which is controlled by the −r
and −s options, nor whether a mode is shown at
all. |
|
−r |
|
Print raw data (the default format) alongside string
data (the −s format); the string data appears
in parentheses after the raw data. |
|
−s |
|
Print mode, uid, gid and the three
time elements as strings instead of numbers. In each case
the format is like that of ls −l. |
|
−t |
|
Always show the type names for the elements of struct
stat. Usually these are only shown when output is to
standard output and no individual element has been
selected. |
|
−T |
|
Never show the type names of the struct stat
elements. |
THE ZSH/TERMCAP MODULE
The
zsh/termcap module makes available one builtin
command:
echotc cap [ arg ... ]
Output the termcap value
corresponding to the capability cap, with optional
arguments.
The
zsh/termcap module makes available one parameter:
termcap
An associative array that maps
termcap capability codes to their values.
THE ZSH/TERMINFO MODULE
The
zsh/terminfo module makes available one builtin
command:
echoti cap
Output the terminfo value
corresponding to the capability cap.
The
zsh/terminfo module makes available one parameter:
terminfo
An associative array that maps
terminfo capability names to their values.
THE ZSH/ZFTP MODULE
The
zsh/zftp module makes available one builtin command:
zftp subcommand [ args ]
The zsh/zftp module is a
client for FTP (file transfer protocol). It is implemented
as a builtin to allow full use of shell command line
editing, file I/O, and job control mechanisms. Often, users
will access it via shell functions providing a more powerful
interface; a set is provided with the zsh
distribution and is described in zshzftpsys(1).
However, the zftp command is entirely usable in its
own right.
All commands
consist of the command name zftp followed by the name
of a subcommand. These are listed below. The return status
of each subcommand is supposed to reflect the success or
failure of the remote operation. See a description of the
variable ZFTP_VERBOSE for more information on how
responses from the server may be printed.
Subcommands
open host [ user [ password [
account ] ] ]
Open a new FTP session to
host, which may be the name of a TCP/IP connected
host or an IP number in the standard dot notation. Remaining
arguments are passed to the login subcommand. Note
that if no arguments beyond host are supplied,
open will not automatically call login.
If no arguments at all are supplied, open will use
the parameters set by the params subcommand.
After a
successful open, the shell variables ZFTP_HOST,
ZFTP_IP and ZFTP_SYSTEM are available; see
’Variables’ below.
login [ name [
password [ account ] ] ]
user [ name [ password [ account ]
] ]
Login the user name with
parameters password and account. Any of the
parameters can be omitted, and will be read from standard
input if needed (name is always needed). If standard
input is a terminal, a prompt for each one will be printed
on standard error and password will not be echoed. If
any of the parameters are not used, a warning message is
printed.
After a
successful login, the shell variables ZFTP_USER,
ZFTP_ACCOUNT and ZFTP_PWD are available; see
’Variables’ below.
This command
may be re−issued when a user is already logged in, and
the server will first be reinitialized for a new user.
params [ host [
user [ password [ account ] ] ] ]
params −
Store the given parameters for
a later open command with no arguments. Only those
given on the command line will be remembered. If no
arguments are given, the parameters currently set are
printed, although the password will appear as a line of
stars; the return value is one if no parameters were set,
zero otherwise.
Any of the
parameters may be specified as a ’?’,
which may need to be quoted to protect it from shell
expansion. In this case, the appropriate parameter will be
read from stdin as with the login subcommand,
including special handling of password. If the
’?’ is followed by a string, that is used
as the prompt for reading the parameter instead of the
default message (any necessary punctuation and whitespace
should be included at the end of the prompt). The first
letter of the parameter (only) may be quoted with a
’\’; hence an argument
"\\$word" guarantees that the string from
the shell parameter $word will be treated literally,
whether or not it begins with a ’?’.
If instead a
single ’−’ is given, the existing
parameters, if any, are deleted. In that case, calling
open with no arguments will cause an error.
The list of
parameters is not deleted after a close, however it
will be deleted if the zsh/zftp module is
unloaded.
For
example,
zftp params
ftp.elsewhere.xx juser ’?Password for juser:
’
will store the
host ftp.elsewhere.xx and the user juser and
then prompt the user for the corresponding password with the
given prompt.
|
test |
|
Test the connection; if the server has reported that it
has closed the connection (maybe due to a timeout), return
status 2; if no connection was open anyway, return status 1;
else return status 0. The test subcommand is silent,
apart from messages printed by the $ZFTP_VERBOSE
mechanism, or error messages if the connection closes. There
is no network overhead for this test. |
The test is
only supported on systems with either the select(2)
or poll(2) system calls; otherwise the message
’not supported on this system’ is printed
instead.
The test
subcommand will automatically be called at the start of any
other subcommand for the current session when a connection
is open.
cd directory
Change the remote directory to
directory. Also alters the shell variable
ZFTP_PWD.
|
cdup |
|
Change the remote directory to the one higher in the
directory tree. Note that cd .. will also work
correctly on non−UNIX systems. |
dir [ args...
]
Give a (verbose) listing of the
remote directory. The args are passed directly to the
server. The command’s behaviour is implementation
dependent, but a UNIX server will typically interpret
args as arguments to the ls command and with
no arguments return the result of ’ls
−l’. The directory is listed to standard
output.
ls [ args ]
Give a (short) listing of the
remote directory. With no args, produces a raw list
of the files in the directory, one per line. Otherwise, up
to vagaries of the server implementation, behaves similar to
dir.
type [ type ]
Change the type for the
transfer to type, or print the current type if
type is absent. The allowed values are
’A’ (ASCII), ’I’
(Image, i.e. binary), or ’B’ (a synonym
for ’I’).
The FTP default
for a transfer is ASCII. However, if zftp finds that
the remote host is a UNIX machine with 8−bit byes, it
will automatically switch to using binary for file transfers
upon open. This can subsequently be overridden.
The transfer
type is only passed to the remote host when a data
connection is established; this command involves no network
overhead.
|
ascii |
|
The same as type A. |
|
|
binary |
|
The same as type I. |
|
mode [ S |
B ]
Set the mode type to stream
(S) or block (B). Stream mode is the default;
block mode is not widely supported.
remote files...
local [ files... ]
Print the size and last
modification time of the remote or local files. If there is
more than one item on the list, the name of the file is
printed first. The first number is the file size, the second
is the last modification time of the file in the format
CCYYMMDDhhmmSS consisting of year, month, date, hour,
minutes and seconds in GMT. Note that this format, including
the length, is guaranteed, so that time strings can be
directly compared via the [[ builtin’s
< and > operators, even if they are too
long to be represented as integers.
Not all servers
support the commands for retrieving this information. In
that case, the remote command will print nothing and
return status 2, compared with status 1 for a file not
found.
The
local command (but not remote) may be used
with no arguments, in which case the information comes from
examining file descriptor zero. This is the same file as
seen by a put command with no further
redirection.
get file
[...]
Retrieve all files from
the server, concatenating them and sending them to standard
output.
put file
[...]
For each file, read a
file from standard input and send that to the remote host
with the given name.
append file
[...]
As put, but if the
remote file already exists, data is appended to it
instead of overwriting it.
getat file point
putat file point
appendat file point
Versions of get,
put and append which will start the transfer
at the given point in the remote file. This is
useful for appending to an incomplete local file. However,
note that this ability is not universally supported by
servers (and is not quite the behaviour specified by the
standard).
delete file
[...]
Delete the list of files on the
server.
mkdir
directory
Create a new directory
directory on the server.
rmdir
directory
Delete the directory
directory on the server.
rename old−name
new−name
Rename file
old−name to new−name on the
server.
site args...
Send a host−specific
command to the server. You will probably only need this if
instructed by the server to use it.
quote args...
Send the raw FTP command
sequence to the server. You should be familiar with the FTP
command set as defined in RFC959 before doing this. Useful
commands may include STAT and HELP. Note also
the mechanism for returning messages as described for the
variable ZFTP_VERBOSE below, in particular that all
messages from the control connection are sent to standard
error.
|
close |
|
|
|
quit |
|
Close the current data connection. This unsets the shell
parameters ZFTP_HOST, ZFTP_IP,
ZFTP_SYSTEM, ZFTP_USER, ZFTP_ACCOUNT,
ZFTP_PWD, ZFTP_TYPE and ZFTP_MODE. |
session [
sessname ]
Allows multiple FTP sessions to
be used at once. The name of the session is an arbitrary
string of characters; the default session is called
’default’. If this command is called
without an argument, it will list all the current sessions;
with an argument, it will either switch to the existing
session called sessname, or create a new session of
that name.
Each session
remembers the status of the connection, the set of
connection−specific shell parameters (the same set as
are unset when a connection closes, as given in the
description of close), and any user parameters
specified with the params subcommand. Changing to a
previous session restores those values; changing to a new
session initialises them in the same way as if zftp
had just been loaded. The name of the current session is
given by the parameter ZFTP_SESSION.
rmsession [
sessname ]
Delete a session; if a name is
not given, the current session is deleted. If the current
session is deleted, the earliest existing session becomes
the new current session, otherwise the current session is
not changed. If the session being deleted is the only one, a
new session called ’default’ is created
and becomes the current session; note that this is a new
session even if the session being deleted is also called
’default’. It is recommended that
sessions not be deleted while background commands which use
zftp are still active.
Parameters
The following shell parameters are used by zftp.
Currently none of them are special.
ZFTP_TMOUT
Integer. The time in seconds to
wait for a network operation to complete before returning an
error. If this is not set when the module is loaded, it will
be given the default value 60. A value of zero turns off
timeouts. If a timeout occurs on the control connection it
will be closed. Use a larger value if this occurs too
frequently.
ZFTP_IP
Readonly. The IP address of the
current connection in dot notation.
ZFTP_HOST
Readonly. The hostname of the
current remote server. If the host was opened as an IP
number, ZFTP_HOST contains that instead; this saves
the overhead for a name lookup, as IP numbers are most
commonly used when a nameserver is unavailable.
ZFTP_SYSTEM
Readonly. The system type
string returned by the server in response to an FTP
SYST request. The most interesting case is a string
beginning "UNIX Type: L8", which ensures
maximum compatibility with a local UNIX host.
ZFTP_TYPE
Readonly. The type to be used
for data transfers , either ’A’ or
’I’. Use the type subcommand to
change this.
ZFTP_USER
Readonly. The username
currently logged in, if any.
ZFTP_ACCOUNT
Readonly. The account name of
the current user, if any. Most servers do not require an
account name.
ZFTP_PWD
Readonly. The current directory
on the server.
ZFTP_CODE
Readonly. The three digit code
of the last FTP reply from the server as a string. This can
still be read after the connection is closed, and is not
changed when the current session changes.
ZFTP_REPLY
Readonly. The last line of the
last reply sent by the server. This can still be read after
the connection is closed, and is not changed when the
current session changes.
ZFTP_SESSION
Readonly. The name of the
current FTP session; see the description of the
session subcommand.
ZFTP_PREFS
A string of preferences for
altering aspects of zftp’s behaviour. Each
preference is a single character. The following are
defined:
|
P |
|
Passive: attempt to make the remote server initiate data
transfers. This is slightly more efficient than sendport
mode. If the letter S occurs later in the string,
zftp will use sendport mode if passive mode is not
available. |
|
S |
|
Sendport: initiate transfers by the FTP PORT
command. If this occurs before any P in the string,
passive mode will never be attempted. |
|
D |
|
Dumb: use only the bare minimum of FTP commands. This
prevents the variables ZFTP_SYSTEM and
ZFTP_PWD from being set, and will mean all
connections default to ASCII type. It may prevent
ZFTP_SIZE from being set during a transfer if the
server does not send it anyway (many servers do). |
If
ZFTP_PREFS is not set when zftp is loaded, it
will be set to a default of ’PS’, i.e.
use passive mode if available, otherwise fall back to
sendport mode.
ZFTP_VERBOSE
A string of digits between 0
and 5 inclusive, specifying which responses from the server
should be printed. All responses go to standard error. If
any of the numbers 1 to 5 appear in the string, raw
responses from the server with reply codes beginning with
that digit will be printed to standard error. The first
digit of the three digit reply code is defined by RFC959 to
correspond to:
|
1. |
|
A positive preliminary reply. |
|
|
2. |
|
A positive completion reply. |
|
|
3. |
|
A positive intermediate reply. |
|
|
4. |
|
A transient negative completion reply. |
|
|
5. |
|
A permanent negative completion reply. |
|
It should be
noted that, for unknown reasons, the reply ’Service
not available’, which forces termination of a
connection, is classified as 421, i.e. ’transient
negative’, an interesting interpretation of the word
’transient’.
The code 0 is
special: it indicates that all but the last line of
multiline replies read from the server will be printed to
standard error in a processed format. By convention, servers
use this mechanism for sending information for the user to
read. The appropriate reply code, if it matches the same
response, takes priority.
If
ZFTP_VERBOSE is not set when zftp is loaded,
it will be set to the default value 450, i.e.,
messages destined for the user and all errors will be
printed. A null string is valid and specifies that no
messages should be printed.
Functions
zftp_chpwd
If this function is set by the
user, it is called every time the directory changes on the
server, including when a user is logged in, or when a
connection is closed. In the last case, $ZFTP_PWD
will be unset; otherwise it will reflect the new
directory.
zftp_progress
If this function is set by the
user, it will be called during a get, put or
append operation each time sufficient data has been
received from the host. During a get, the data is
sent to standard output, so it is vital that this function
should write to standard error or directly to the terminal,
not to standard output.
When it is
called with a transfer in progress, the following additional
shell parameters are set:
ZFTP_FILE
The name of the remote file
being transferred from or to.
ZFTP_TRANSFER
A G for a get
operation and a P for a put operation.
ZFTP_SIZE
The total size of the complete
file being transferred: the same as the first value provided
by the remote and local subcommands for a
particular file. If the server cannot supply this value for
a remote file being retrieved, it will not be set. If input
is from a pipe the value may be incorrect and correspond
simply to a full pipe buffer.
ZFTP_COUNT
The amount of data so far
transferred; a number between zero and $ZFTP_SIZE, if
that is set. This number is always available.
The function is
initially called with ZFTP_TRANSFER set appropriately
and ZFTP_COUNT set to zero. After the transfer is
finished, the function will be called one more time with
ZFTP_TRANSFER set to GF or PF, in case
it wishes to tidy up. It is otherwise never called twice
with the same value of ZFTP_COUNT.
Sometimes the
progress meter may cause disruption. It is up to the user to
decide whether the function should be defined and to use
unfunction when necessary.
Problems
A connection may not be opened in the left hand side of a
pipe as this occurs in a subshell and the file information
is not updated in the main shell. In the case of type or
mode changes or closing the connection in a subshell, the
information is returned but variables are not updated until
the next call to zftp. Other status changes in
subshells will not be reflected by changes to the variables
(but should be otherwise harmless).
Deleting
sessions while a zftp command is active in the
background can have unexpected effects, even if it does not
use the session being deleted. This is because all shell
subprocesses share information on the state of all
connections, and deleting a session changes the ordering of
that information.
On some
operating systems, the control connection is not valid after
a fork(), so that operations in subshells, on the left hand
side of a pipeline, or in the background are not possible,
as they should be. This is presumably a bug in the operating
system.
THE ZSH/ZLE MODULE
The
zsh/zle module contains the Zsh Line Editor. See
zshzle(1).
THE ZSH/ZLEPARAMETER MODULE
The
zsh/zleparameter module defines two special
parameters that can be used to access internal information
of the Zsh Line Editor (see zshzle(1)).
keymaps
This array contains the names
of the keymaps currently defined.
widgets
This associative array contains
one entry per widget defined. The name of the widget is the
key and the value gives information about the widget. It is
either the string ’builtin’ for builtin
widgets, a string of the form
’user:name’ for user−defined
widgets, where name is the name of the shell function
implementing the widget, or it is a string of the form
’completion:type:name’,
for completion widgets. In the last case type is the
name of the builtin widgets the completion widget imitates
in its behavior and name is the name of the shell
function implementing the completion widget.
THE ZSH/ZPROF MODULE
When loaded,
the zsh/zprof causes shell functions to be profiled.
The profiling results can be obtained with the zprof
builtin command made available by this module. There is no
way to turn profiling off other than unloading the module.
zprof [ −c ]
Without the −c
option, zprof lists profiling results to standard
output. The format is comparable to that of commands like
gprof.
At the top
there is a summary listing all functions that were called at
least once. This summary is sorted in decreasing order of
the amount of time spent in each. The lines contain the
number of the function in order, which is used in other
parts of the list in suffixes of the form
’[num]’.RE, then the number
of calls made to the function. The next three columns list
the time in milliseconds spent in the function and its
descendents, the average time in milliseconds spent in the
function and its descendents per call and the percentage of
time spent in all shell functions used in this function and
its descendents. The following three columns give the same
information, but counting only the time spent in the
function itself. The final column shows the name of the
function.
After the
summary, detailed information about every function that was
invoked is listed, sorted in decreasing order of the amount
of time spent in each function and its descendents. Each of
these entries consists of descriptions for the functions
that called the function described, the function itself, and
the functions that were called from it. The description for
the function itself has the same format as in the summary
(and shows the same information). The other lines
don’t show the number of the function at the beginning
and have their function named indented to make it easier to
distinguish the line showing the function described in the
section from the surrounding lines.
The information
shown in this case is almost the same as in the summary, but
only refers to the call hierarchy being displayed. For
example, for a calling function the column showing the total
running time lists the time spent in the described function
and its descendents only for the times when it was called
from that particular calling function. Likewise, for a
called function, this columns lists the total time spent in
the called function and its descendents only for the times
when it was called from the function described.
Also in this
case, the column showing the number of calls to a function
also shows a slash and then the total number of invocations
made to the called function.
As long as the
zsh/zprof module is loaded, profiling will be done
and multiple invocations of the zprof builtin command
will show the times and numbers of calls since the module
was loaded. With the −c option, the
zprof builtin command will reset its internal
counters and will not show the listing. )
THE ZSH/ZPTY MODULE
The
zsh/zpty module offers one builtin:
zpty [ −e ] [ −b ] name
[ arg ... ]
The arguments following
name are concatenated with spaces between, then
executed as a command, as if passed to the eval
builtin. The command runs under a newly assigned
pseudo−terminal; this is useful for running commands
non−interactively which expect an interactive
environment. The name is not part of the command, but
is used to refer to this command in later calls to
zpty.
With the
−e option, the pseudo−terminal is set up
so that input characters are echoed.
With the
−b option, input to and output from the
pseudo−terminal are made non−blocking.
zpty −d [
names ... ]
The second form, with the
−d option, is used to delete commands
previously started, by supplying a list of their
names. If no names are given, all commands are
deleted. Deleting a command causes the HUP signal to be sent
to the corresponding process.
zpty −w [
−n ] name [ strings ... ]
The −w option can
be used to send the to command name the given
strings as input (separated by spaces). If the
−n option is not given, a newline is
added at the end.
If no
strings are provided, the standard input is copied to
the pseudo−terminal; this may stop before copying the
full input if the pseudo−terminal is
non−blocking.
Note that the
command under the pseudo−terminal sees this input as
if it were typed, so beware when sending special tty driver
characters such as word−erase, line−kill, and
end−of−file.
zpty −r [
−t ] name [ param [
pattern ] ]
The −r option can
be used to read the output of the command name. With
only a name argument, the output read is copied to
the standard output. Unless the pseudo−terminal is
non−blocking, copying continues until the command
under the pseudo−terminal exits; when
non−blocking, only as much output as is immediately
available is copied. The return value is zero if any output
is copied.
When also given
a param argument, at most one line is read and stored
in the parameter named param. Less than a full line
may be read if the pseudo−terminal is
non−blocking. The return value is zero if at least one
character is stored in param.
If a
pattern is given as well, output is read until the
whole string read matches the pattern, even in the
non−blocking case. The return value is zero if the
string read matches the pattern, or if the command has
exited but at least one character could still be read. As of
this writing, a maximum of one megabyte of output can be
consumed this way; if a full megabyte is read without
matching the pattern, the return value is
non−zero.
In all cases,
the return value is non−zero if nothing could be read,
and is 2 if this is because the command has
finished.
If the
−r option is combined with the −t
option, zpty tests whether output is available before
trying to read. If no output is available, zpty
immediately returns the value 1.
zpty −t
name
The −t option
without the −r option can be used to test
whether the command name is still running. It returns
a zero value if the command is running and a non−zero
value otherwise.
zpty [ −L
]
The last form, without any
arguments, is used to list the commands currently defined.
If the −L option is given, this is done in the
form of calls to the zpty builtin.
THE ZSH/ZUTIL MODULE
The
zsh/zutil module only adds some builtins:
zstyle [ −L ]
zstyle [ −e | − |
−− ] pattern style strings ...
zstyle −d [ pattern [ styles ... ] ]
zstyle −g name [ pattern [
style ] ]
zstyle −abs context style name [ sep
]
zstyle −Tt context style [ strings
...]
zstyle −m context style pattern
This builtin command is used to
define and lookup styles. Styles are pairs of names and
values, where the values consist of any number of strings.
They are stored together with patterns and lookup is done by
giving a string, called the ’context’, which is
compared to the patterns. The definition stored for the
first matching pattern will be returned.
For ordering of
comparisons, patterns are searched from most specific to
least specific, and patterns that are equally specific keep
the order in which they were defined. A pattern is
considered to be more specific than another if it contains
more components (substrings separated by colons) or if the
patterns for the components are more specific, where simple
strings are considered to be more specific than patterns and
complex patterns are considered to be more specific than the
pattern ’*’.
The first form
(without arguments) lists the definitions in the order
zstyle will test them. If the −L option
is given, listing is done in the form of calls to
zstyle. Forms with arguments:
zstyle [ − | −− |
−e ] pattern style strings ...
Defines the given style
for the pattern with the strings as the value.
If the −e option is given, the strings
will be concatenated (separated by spaces) and the resulting
string will be evaluated (in the same way as it is done by
the eval builtin command) when the style is looked
up. In this case the parameter ’reply’
must be assigned to set the strings returned after the
evaluation. Before evaluating the value, reply is
unset, and if it is still unset after the evaluation, the
style is treated as if it were not set.
zstyle −d [
pattern [ styles ... ] ]
Delete style definitions.
Without arguments all definitions are deleted, with a
pattern all definitions for that pattern are deleted
and if any styles are given, then only those styles
are deleted for the pattern.
zstyle −g
name [ pattern [ style ] ]
Retrieve a style definition.
The name is used as the name of an array in which the
results are stored. Without any further arguments, all
patterns defined are returned. With a pattern
the styles defined for that pattern are returned and with
both a pattern and a style, the value strings
of that combination is returned.
The other forms
can be used to look up or test patterns.
zstyle −s context style name [ sep
]
The parameter name is
set to the value of the style interpreted as a string. If
the value contains several strings they are concatenated
with spaces (or with the sep string if that is given)
between them.
zstyle −b
context style name
The value is stored in
name as a boolean, i.e. as the string
’yes’ if the value has only one string
and that string is equal to one of ’yes’,
’true’, ’on’, or
’1’. If the value is any other string or
has more than one string, the parameter is set to
’no’.
zstyle −a
context style name
The value is stored in
name as an array. If name is declared as an
associative array, the first, third, etc. strings are used
as the keys and the other strings are used as the
values.
zstyle −t
context style [ strings ...]
zstyle −T context style [ strings
...]
Test the value of a style, i.e.
the −t option only returns a status (sets
$?). Without any strings the return status is
zero if the style is defined for at least one matching
pattern, has only one string in its value, and that is equal
to one of ’true’,
’yes’, ’on’ or
’1’. If any strings are given the
status is zero if and only if at least one of the
strings is equal to at least one of the strings in
the value. If the style is not defined, the status is
2.
The
−T option tests the values of the style like
−t, but it returns zero (rather than 2)
if the style is not defined for any matching pattern.
zstyle −m
context style pattern
Match a value. Returns status
zero if the pattern matches at least one of the
strings in the value.
zformat −f
param format specs ...
zformat −a array sep specs ...
This builtin provides two
different forms of formatting. The first form is selected
with the −f option. In this case the
format string will be modified by replacing sequences
starting with a percent sign in it with strings from the
specs. Each spec should be of the form
’char:string’ which will
cause every appearance of the sequence
’%char’ in format to be
replaced by the string. The ’%’
sequence may also contain optional minimum and maximum field
width specifications between the ’%’ and
the ’char’ in the form
’%min.maxc’,
i.e. the minimum field width is given first and if the
maximum field width is used, it has to be preceded by a dot.
Specifying a minimum field width makes the result be padded
with spaces to the right if the string is shorter
than the requested width. Padding to the left can be
achieved by giving a negative minimum field width. If a
maximum field width is specified, the string will be
truncated after that many characters. After all
’%’ sequences for the given specs
have been processed, the resulting string is stored in the
parameter param.
The second
form, using the −a option, can be used for
aligning strings. Here, the specs are of the form
’left:right’ where
’left’ and ’right’ are
arbitrary strings. These strings are modified by replacing
the colons by the sep string and padding the
left strings with spaces to the right so that the
sep strings in the result (and hence the right
strings after them) are all aligned if the strings are
printed below each other. All strings without a colon are
left unchanged and all strings with an empty right
string have the trailing colon removed. In both cases the
lengths of the strings are not used to determine how the
other strings are to be aligned. The resulting strings are
stored in the array.
zregexparse
This implements some internals
of the _regex_arguments function.
zparseopts [
−D ] [ −K ] [ −E ] [
−a array ] [ −A
assoc ] specs
This builtin simplifies the
parsing of options in positional parameters, i.e. the set of
arguments given by $*. Each spec describes one
option and must be of the form
’opt[=array]’. If an option
described by opt is found in the positional
parameters it is copied into the array specified with
the −a option; if the optional
’=array’ is given, it is instead
copied into that array.
Note that it is
an error to give any spec without an
’=array’ unless one of the
−a or −A options is used.
Unless the
−E option is given, parsing stops at the first
string that isn’t described by one of the
specs. Even with −E, parsing always
stops at a positional parameter equal to
’−’ or
’−−’.
The opt
description must be one of the following. Any of the special
characters can appear in the option name provided it is
preceded by a backslash.
|
name |
|
|
|
name+ |
|
The name is the name of the option without the
leading ’−’. To specify a
GNU−style long option, one of the usual two leading
’−’ must be included in
name; for example, a
’−−file’ option is
represented by a name of
’−file’. |
If a
’+’ appears after name, the option
is appended to array each time it is found in the
positional parameters; without the ’+’
only the last occurrence of the option is
preserved.
If one of these
forms is used, the option takes no argument, so parsing
stops if the next positional parameter does not also begin
with ’−’ (unless the
−E option is used).
|
name: |
|
|
|
name:− |
|
|
|
name:: |
|
If one or two colons are given, the option takes an
argument; with one colon, the argument is mandatory and with
two colons it is optional. The argument is appended to the
array after the option itself. |
An optional
argument is put into the same array element as the option
name (note that this makes empty strings as arguments
indistinguishable). A mandatory argument is added as a
separate element unless the ’:−’
form is used, in which case the argument is put into the
same element.
A
’+’ as described above may appear between
the name and the first colon.
The options of
zparseopts itself are:
−a array
As described above, this names
the default array in which to store the recognised
options.
−A
assoc
If this is given, the options
and their values are also put into an associative array with
the option names as keys and the arguments (if any) as the
values.
|
−D |
|
If this option is given, all options found are removed
from the positional parameters of the calling shell or shell
function, up to but not including any not described by the
specs. This is similar to using the shift
builtin. |
|
−K |
|
With this option, the arrays specified with the
−a and −A options and with the
’=array’ forms are kept unchanged
when none of the specs for them is used. This allows
assignment of default values to them before calling
zparseopts. |
|
−E |
|
This changes the parsing rules to not stop at the
first string that isn’t described by one of the
specs. It can be used to test for or (if used
together with −D) extract options and their
arguments, ignoring all other options and arguments that may
be in the positional parameters. |
For
example,
set
−− −a −bx −c y −cz baz
−cend
zparseopts a=foo b:=bar c+:=bar
will have the
effect of
foo=(−a)
bar=(−b x −c y −c z)
The arguments
from ’baz’ on will not be used.
As an example
for the −E option, consider:
set
−− −a x −b y −c z arg1 arg2
zparseopts −E −D b:=bar
will have the
effect of
bar=(−b
y)
set −− −a x −c z arg1 arg2
I.e., the
option −b and its arguments are taken from the
positional parameters and put into the array bar.
NAME
zshzftpsys − zftp
function front−end
DESCRIPTION
This describes
the set of shell functions supplied with the source
distribution as an interface to the zftp builtin
command, allowing you to perform FTP operations from the
shell command line or within functions or scripts. The
interface is similar to a traditional FTP client (e.g. the
ftp command itself, see ftp(1)), but as it is
entirely done within the shell all the familiar completion,
editing and globbing features, and so on, are present, and
macros are particularly simple to write as they are just
ordinary shell functions.
The
prerequisite is that the zftp command, as described
in zshmodules(1) , must be available in the version
of zsh installed at your site. If the shell is
configured to load new commands at run time, it probably is:
typing ’zmodload zsh/zftp’ will make sure
(if that runs silently, it has worked). If this is not the
case, it is possible zftp was linked into the shell
anyway: to test this, type ’which zftp’
and if zftp is available you will get the message
’zftp: shell built−in command’.
Commands given
directly with zftp builtin may be interspersed
between the functions in this suite; in a few cases, using
zftp directly may cause some of the status
information stored in shell parameters to become invalid.
Note in particular the description of the variables
$ZFTP_TMOUT, $ZFTP_PREFS and
$ZFTP_VERBOSE for zftp.
INSTALLATION
You should make
sure all the functions from the Functions/Zftp
directory of the source distribution are available; they all
begin with the two letters ’zf’. They may
already have been installed on your system; otherwise, you
will need to find them and copy them. The directory should
appear as one of the elements of the $fpath array
(this should already be the case if they were installed),
and at least the function zfinit should be
autoloaded; it will autoload the rest. Finally, to
initialize the use of the system you need to call the
zfinit function. The following code in your
.zshrc will arrange for this; assume the functions
are stored in the directory ~/myfns:
fpath=(~/myfns
$fpath)
autoload −U zfinit
zfinit
Note that
zfinit assumes you are using the zmodload
method to load the zftp command. If it is already
built into the shell, change zfinit to zfinit
−n. It is helpful (though not essential) if the
call to zfinit appears after any code to initialize
the new completion system, else unnecessary compctl
commands will be given.
FUNCTIONS
The sequence of
operations in performing a file transfer is essentially the
same as that in a standard FTP client. Note that, due to a
quirk of the shell’s getopts builtin, for those
functions that handle options you must use
’−−’ rather than
’−’ to ensure the remaining
arguments are treated literally (a single
’−’ is treated as an argument).
Opening a
connection
zfparams [ host [ user [
password ... ] ] ]
Set or show the parameters for
a future zfopen with no arguments. If no arguments
are given, the current parameters are displayed (the
password will be shown as a line of asterisks). If a host is
given, and either the user or password is not,
they will be prompted for; also, any parameter given as
’?’ will be prompted for, and if the
’?’ is followed by a string, that will be
used as the prompt. As zfopen calls zfparams
to store the parameters, this usually need not be called
directly.
A single
argument ’−’ will delete the stored
parameters. This will also cause the memory of the last
directory (and so on) on the other host to be deleted.
zfopen [ −1 ] [
host [ user [ password
[ account ] ] ] ]
If host is present, open
a connection to that host under username user with
password password (and, on the rare occasions when it
is necessary, account account). If a necessary
parameter is missing or given as ’?’ it
will be prompted for. If host is not present, use a
previously stored set of parameters.
If the command
was successful, and the terminal is compatible with
xterm or is sun−cmd, a summary will
appear in the title bar, giving the local
host:directory and the remote host:directory;
this is handled by the function zftp_chpwd, described
below.
Normally, the
host, user and password are internally
recorded for later re−opening, either by a
zfopen with no arguments, or automatically (see
below). With the option ’−1’, no
information is stored. Also, if an open command with
arguments failed, the parameters will not be retained (and
any previous parameters will also be deleted). A
zfopen on its own, or a zfopen −1, never
alters the stored parameters.
Both
zfopen and zfanon (but not zfparams)
understand URLs of the form
ftp://host/path... as meaning to
connect to the host, then change directory to
path (which must be a directory, not a file). The
’ftp://’ can be omitted; the trailing
’/’ is enough to trigger recognition of
the path. Note prefixes other than
’ftp:’ are not recognized, and that all
characters after the first slash beyond host are
significant in path.
zfanon [ −1 ]
host
Open a connection host
for anonymous FTP. The username used is
’anonymous’. The password (which will be
reported the first time) is generated as
user@host; this is then stored in the
shell parameter $EMAIL_ADDR which can alternatively
be set manually to a suitable string.
Directory
management
zfcd [ dir ]
zfcd old new
Change the current directory on
the remote server: this is implemented to have many of the
features of the shell builtin cd.
In the first
form with dir present, change to the directory
dir. The command ’zfcd ..’ is
treated specially, so is guaranteed to work on
non−UNIX servers (note this is handled internally by
zftp). If dir is omitted, has the effect of
’zfcd ~’.
The second form
changes to the directory previously current.
The third form
attempts to change the current directory by replacing the
first occurrence of the string old with the string
new in the current directory.
Note that in
this command, and indeed anywhere a remote filename is
expected, the string which on the local host corresponds to
’~’ is converted back to a
’~’ before being passed to the remote
machine. This is convenient because of the way expansion is
performed on the command line before zfcd receives a
string. For example, suppose the command is ’zfcd
~/foo’. The shell will expand this to a full path
such as ’zfcd /home/user2/pws/foo’. At
this stage, zfcd recognises the initial path as
corresponding to ’~’ and will send the
directory to the remote host as ~/foo, so that the
’~’ will be expanded by the server to the
correct remote host directory. Other named directories of
the form ’~name’ are not treated in this
fashion.
|
zfhere |
|
Change directory on the remote server to the one
corresponding to the current local directory, with special
handling of ’~’ as in zfcd. For
example, if the current local directory is ~/foo/bar,
then zfhere performs the effect of ’zfcd
~/foo/bar’. |
zfdir [ −rfd ] [
− ] [ dir−options ] [
dir ]
Produce a long directory
listing. The arguments dir−options and
dir are passed directly to the server and their
effect is implementation dependent, but specifying a
particular remote directory dir is usually possible.
The output is passed through a pager given by the
environment variable $PAGER, or
’more’ if that is not set.
The directory
is usually cached for re−use. In fact, two caches are
maintained. One is for use when there is no
dir−options or dir, i.e. a full listing
of the current remote directory; it is flushed when the
current remote directory changes. The other is kept for
repeated use of zfdir with the same arguments; for
example, repeated use of ’zfdir /pub/gnu’
will only require the directory to be retrieved on the first
call. Alternatively, this cache can be re−viewed with
the −r option. As relative directories will
confuse zfdir, the −f option can be used
to force the cache to be flushed before the directory is
listed. The option −d will delete both caches
without showing a directory listing; it will also delete the
cache of file names in the current remote directory, if
any.
zfls [
ls−options ] [ dir ]
List files on the remote
server. With no arguments, this will produce a simple list
of file names for the current remote directory. Any
arguments are passed directly to the server. No pager and no
caching is used.
Status
commands
zftype [ type ]
With no arguments, show the
type of data to be transferred, usually ASCII or binary.
With an argument, change the type: the types
’A’ or ’ASCII’ for
ASCII data and ’B’ or
’BINARY’, ’I’ or
’IMAGE’ for binary data are understood
case−insensitively.
zfstat [ −v ]
Show the status of the current
or last connection, as well as the status of some of
zftp’s status variables. With the
−v option, a more verbose listing is produced
by querying the server for its version of events, too.
Retrieving
files
The commands for retrieving files all take at least two
options. −G suppresses remote filename
expansion which would otherwise be performed (see below for
a more detailed description of that). −t
attempts to set the modification time of the local file to
that of the remote file: this requires version 5 of
perl, see the description of the function
zfrtime below for more information.
zfget [ −Gtc ] file1 ...
Retrieve all the listed files
file1 ... one at a time from the remote server. If a
file contains a ’/’, the full name is
passed to the remote server, but the file is stored locally
under the name given by the part after the final
’/’. The option −c (cat)
forces all files to be sent as a single stream to standard
output; in this case the −t option has no
effect.
zfuget [ −Gvst ]
file1 ...
As zfget, but only
retrieve files where the version on the remote server is
newer (has a later modification time), or where the local
file does not exist. If the remote file is older but the
files have different sizes, or if the sizes are the same but
the remote file is newer, the user will usually be queried.
With the option −s, the command runs silently
and will always retrieve the file in either of those two
cases. With the option −v, the command prints
more information about the files while it is working out
whether or not to transfer them.
zfcget [ −Gt ]
file1 ...
As zfget, but if any of
the local files exists, and is shorter than the
corresponding remote file, the command assumes that it is
the result of a partially completed transfer and attempts to
transfer the rest of the file. This is useful on a poor
connection which keeps failing.
Note that this
requires a commonly implemented, but non−standard,
version of the FTP protocol, so is not guaranteed to work on
all servers.
zfgcp [ −Gt ]
remote−file local−file
zfgcp [ −Gt ] rfile1 ...
ldir
This retrieves files from the
remote server with arguments behaving similarly to the
cp command.
In the first
form, copy remote−file from the server to the
local file local−file.
In the second
form, copy all the remote files rfile1 ... into the
local directory ldir retaining the same basenames.
This assumes UNIX directory semantics.
Sending
files
zfput [ −r ] file1 ...
Send all the file1 ...
given separately to the remote server. If a filename
contains a ’/’, the full filename is used
locally to find the file, but only the basename is used for
the remote file name.
With the option
−r, if any of the files are directories
they are sent recursively with all their subdirectories,
including files beginning with ’.’. This
requires that the remote machine understand UNIX file
semantics, since ’/’ is used as a
directory separator.
zfuput [ −vs ]
file1 ...
As zfput, but only send
files which are newer than their local equivalents, or if
the remote file does not exist. The logic is the same as for
zfuget, but reversed between local and remote
files.
zfcput file1
...
As zfput, but if any
remote file already exists and is shorter than the local
equivalent, assume it is the result of an incomplete
transfer and send the rest of the file to append to the
existing part. As the FTP append command is part of the
standard set, this is in principle more likely to work than
zfcget.
zfpcp
local−file remote−file
zfpcp lfile1 ... rdir
This sends files to the remote
server with arguments behaving similarly to the cp
command.
With two
arguments, copy local−file to the server as
remote−file.
With more than
two arguments, copy all the local files lfile1 ...
into the existing remote directory rdir retaining the
same basenames. This assumes UNIX directory semantics.
A problem
arises if you attempt to use zfpcp lfile1
rdir, i.e. the second form of copying but with two
arguments, as the command has no simple way of knowing if
rdir corresponds to a directory or a filename. It
attempts to resolve this in various ways. First, if the
rdir argument is ’.’ or
’..’ or ends in a slash, it is assumed to
be a directory. Secondly, if the operation of copying to a
remote file in the first form failed, and the remote server
sends back the expected failure code 553 and a reply
including the string ’Is a directory’,
then zfpcp will retry using the second form.
Closing the
connection
zfclose
Close the connection.
Session
management
zfsession [ −lvod ] [ sessname ]
Allows you to manage multiple
FTP sessions at once. By default, connections take place in
a session called ’default’; by giving the
command ’zfsession sessname’ you
can change to a new or existing session with a name of your
choice. The new session remembers its own connection, as
well as associated shell parameters, and also the host/user
parameters set by zfparams. Hence you can have
different sessions set up to connect to different hosts,
each remembering the appropriate host, user and
password.
With no
arguments, zfsession prints the name of the current
session; with the option −l it lists all
sessions which currently exist, and with the option
−v it gives a verbose list showing the host and
directory for each session, where the current session is
marked with an asterisk. With −o, it will
switch to the most recent previous session.
With
−d, the given session (or else the current one)
is removed; everything to do with it is completely
forgotten. If it was the only session, a new session called
’default’ is created and made current. It
is safest not to delete sessions while background commands
using zftp are active.
zftransfer
sess1:file1
sess2:file2
Transfer files between two
sessions; no local copy is made. The file is read from the
session sess1 as file1 and written to session
sess2 as file file2; file1 and
file2 may be relative to the current directories of
the session. Either sess1 or sess2 may be
omitted (though the colon should be retained if there is a
possibility of a colon appearing in the file name) and
defaults to the current session; file2 may be omitted
or may end with a slash, in which case the basename of
file1 will be added. The sessions sess1 and
sess2 must be distinct.
The operation
is performed using pipes, so it is required that the
connections still be valid in a subshell, which is not the
case under versions of some operating systems, presumably
due to a system bug.
Bookmarks
The two functions zfmark and zfgoto allow you
to ’bookmark’ the present location (host, user
and directory) of the current FTP connection for later use.
The file to be used for storing and retrieving bookmarks is
given by the parameter $ZFTP_BMFILE; if not set when
one of the two functions is called, it will be set to the
file .zfbkmarks in the directory where your zsh
startup files live (usually ~).
zfmark [ bookmark ]
If given an argument, mark the
current host, user and directory under the name
bookmark for later use by zfgoto. If there is
no connection open, use the values for the last connection
immediately before it was closed; it is an error if there
was none. Any existing bookmark under the same name will be
silently replaced.
If not given an
argument, list the existing bookmarks and the points to
which they refer in the form
user@host:directory; this
is the format in which they are stored, and the file may be
edited directly.
zfgoto [ −n ]
bookmark
Return to the location given by
bookmark, as previously set by zfmark. If the
location has user ’ftp’ or
’anonymous’, open the connection with
zfanon, so that no password is required. If the user
and host parameters match those stored for the current
session, if any, those will be used, and again no password
is required. Otherwise a password will be prompted for.
With the option
−n, the bookmark is taken to be a nickname
stored by the ncftp program in its bookmark file,
which is assumed to be ~/.ncftp/bookmarks. The
function works identically in other ways. Note that there is
no mechanism for adding or modifying ncftp bookmarks
from the zftp functions.
Other
functions
Mostly, these functions will not be called directly (apart
from zfinit), but are described here for
completeness. You may wish to alter zftp_chpwd and
zftp_progress, in particular.
zfinit [ −n ]
As described above, this is
used to initialize the zftp function system. The
−n option should be used if the zftp command is
already built into the shell.
zfautocheck [ −dn
]
This function is called to
implement automatic reopening behaviour, as described in
more detail below. The options must appear in the first
argument; −n prevents the command from changing
to the old directory, while −d prevents it from
setting the variable do_close, which it otherwise
does as a flag for automatically closing the connection
after a transfer. The host and directory for the last
session are stored in the variable $zflastsession,
but the internal host/user/password parameters must also be
correctly set.
zfcd_match prefix
suffix
This performs matching for
completion of remote directory names. If the remote server
is UNIX, it will attempt to persuade the server to list the
remote directory with subdirectories marked, which usually
works but is not guaranteed. On other hosts it simply calls
zfget_match and hence completes all files, not just
directories. On some systems, directories may not even look
like filenames.
zfget_match prefix
suffix
This performs matching for
completion of remote filenames. It caches files for the
current directory (only) in the shell parameter
$zftp_fcache. It is in the form to be called by the
−K option of compctl, but also works
when called from a widget−style completion function
with prefix and suffix set appropriately.
zfrglob
varname
Perform remote globbing, as
describes in more detail below. varname is the name
of a variable containing the pattern to be expanded; if
there were any matches, the same variable will be set to the
expanded set of filenames on return.
zfrtime lfile
rfile [ time ]
Set the local file lfile
to have the same modification time as the remote file
rfile, or the explicit time time in FTP format
CCYYMMDDhhmmSS for the GMT timezone.
Currently this
requires perl version 5 to perform the conversion
from GMT to local time. This is unfortunately difficult to
do using shell code alone.
zftp_chpwd
This function is called every
time a connection is opened, or closed, or the remote
directory changes. This version alters the title bar of an
xterm−compatible or sun−cmd
terminal emulator to reflect the local and remote hostnames
and current directories. It works best when combined with
the function chpwd. In particular, a function of the
form
chpwd() {
if [[ −n $ZFTP_USER ]]; then
zftp_chpwd
else
# usual chpwd e.g put host:directory in title bar
fi
}
fits in
well.
zftp_progress
This function shows the status
of the transfer. It will not write anything unless the
output is going to a terminal; however, if you transfer
files in the background, you should turn off progress
reports by hand using ’zstyle ’:zftp:*’
progress none’. Note also that if you alter it,
any output must be to standard error, as standard
output may be a file being received. The form of the
progress meter, or whether it is used at all, can be
configured without altering the function, as described in
the next section.
zffcache
This is used to implement
caching of files in the current directory for each session
separately. It is used by zfget_match and
zfrglob.
MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES
Configuration
Various styles are available using the standard shell style
mechanism, described in zshmodules(1). Briefly, the
command ’zstyle ’:zftp:*’ style
value ...’. defines the style to have value
value; more than one value may be given, although
that is not useful in the cases described here. These values
will then be used throughout the zftp function system. For
more precise control, the first argument, which gives a
context in which the style applies, can be modified to
include a particular function, as for example
’:zftp:zfget’: the style will then have
the given value only in the zfget function. Values
for the same style in different contexts may be set; the
most specific function will be used, where strings are held
to be more specific than patterns, and longer patterns and
shorter patterns. Note that only the top level function
name, as called by the user, is used; calling of lower level
functions is transparent to the user. Hence modifications to
the title bar in zftp_chpwd use the contexts
:zftp:zfopen, :zftp:zfcd, etc., depending
where it was called from. The following styles are
understood:
progress
Controls the way that
zftp_progress reports on the progress of a transfer.
If empty, unset, or ’none’, no progress
report is made; if ’bar’ a growing bar of
inverse video is shown; if ’percent’ (or
any other string, though this may change in future), the
percentage of the file transferred is shown. The bar meter
requires that the width of the terminal be available via the
$COLUMNS parameter (normally this is set
automatically). If the size of the file being transferred is
not available, bar and percent meters will
simply show the number of bytes transferred so far.
When
zfinit is run, if this style is not defined for the
context :zftp:*, it will be set to
’bar’.
|
update |
|
Specifies the minimum time interval between updates of
the progress meter in seconds. No update is made unless new
data has been received, so the actual time interval is
limited only by $ZFTP_TIMEOUT. |
As described
for progress, zfinit will force this to
default to 1.
remote−glob
If set to ’1’,
’yes’ or ’true’, filename generation
(globbing) is performed on the remote machine instead of by
zsh itself; see below.
titlebar
If set to ’1’,
’yes’ or ’true’, zftp_chpwd
will put the remote host and remote directory into the
titlebar of terminal emulators such as xterm or
sun−cmd that allow this.
As described
for progress, zfinit will force this to
default to 1.
|
chpwd |
|
If set to ’1’ ’yes’ or
’true’, zftp_chpwd will call the function
chpwd when a connection is closed. This is useful if
the remote host details were put into the terminal title bar
by zftp_chpwd and your usual chpwd also
modifies the title bar. |
When
zfinit is run, it will determine whether chpwd
exists and if so it will set the default value for the style
to 1 if none exists already.
Note that there
is also an associative array zfconfig which contains
values used by the function system. This should not be
modified or overwritten.
Remote
globbing
The commands for retrieving files usually perform filename
generation (globbing) on their arguments; this can be turned
off by passing the option −G to each of the
commands. Normally this operates by retrieving a complete
list of files for the directory in question, then matching
these locally against the pattern supplied. This has the
advantage that the full range of zsh patterns (respecting
the setting of the option EXTENDED_GLOB) can be used.
However, it means that the directory part of a filename will
not be expanded and must be given exactly. If the remote
server does not support the UNIX directory semantics,
directory handling is problematic and it is recommended that
globbing only be used within the current directory. The list
of files in the current directory, if retrieved, will be
cached, so that subsequent globs in the same directory
without an intervening zfcd are much faster.
If the
remote−glob style (see above) is set, globbing
is instead performed on the remote host: the server is asked
for a list of matching files. This is highly dependent on
how the server is implemented, though typically UNIX servers
will provide support for basic glob patterns. This may in
some cases be faster, as it avoids retrieving the entire
list of directory contents.
Automatic
and temporary reopening
As described for the zfopen command, a subsequent
zfopen with no parameters will reopen the connection
to the last host (this includes connections made with the
zfanon command). Opened in this fashion, the
connection starts in the default remote directory and will
remain open until explicitly closed.
Automatic
re−opening is also available. If a connection is not
currently open and a command requiring a connection is
given, the last connection is implicitly reopened. In this
case the directory which was current when the connection was
closed again becomes the current directory (unless, of
course, the command given changes it). Automatic reopening
will also take place if the connection was close by the
remote server for whatever reason (e.g. a timeout). It is
not available if the −1 option to zfopen
or zfanon was used.
Furthermore, if
the command issued is a file transfer, the connection will
be closed after the transfer is finished, hence providing a
one−shot mode for transfers. This does not apply to
directory changing or listing commands; for example a
zfdir may reopen a connection but will leave it open.
Also, automatic closure will only ever happen in the same
command as automatic opening, i.e a zfdir directly
followed by a zfget will never close the connection
automatically.
Information
about the previous connection is given by the zfstat
function. So, for example, if that reports:
Session:
default
Not connected.
Last session: ftp.bar.com:/pub/textfiles
then the
command zfget file.txt will attempt to reopen a
connection to ftp.bar.com, retrieve the file
/pub/textfiles/file.txt, and immediately close the
connection again. On the other hand, zfcd .. will
open the connection in the directory /pub and leave
it open.
Note that all
the above is local to each session; if you return to a
previous session, the connection for that session is the one
which will be reopened.
Completion
Completion of local and remote files, directories, sessions
and bookmarks is supported. The older,
compctl−style completion is defined when
zfinit is called; support for the new
widget−based completion system is provided in the
function Completion/Zsh/Command/_zftp, which should
be installed with the other functions of the completion
system and hence should automatically be available.
NAME
zshcontrib − user
contributions to zsh
DESCRIPTION
The Zsh source
distribution includes a number of items contributed by the
user community. These are not inherently a part of the
shell, and some may not be available in every zsh
installation. The most significant of these are documented
here. For documentation on other contributed items such as
shell functions, look for comments in the function source
files.
UTILITIES
Accessing
On−Line Help
The key sequence ESC h is normally bound by ZLE to
execute the run−help widget (see
zshzle(1)). This invokes the run−help
command with the command word from the current input line as
its argument. By default, run−help is an alias
for the man command, so this often fails when the
command word is a shell builtin or a user−defined
function. By redefining the run−help alias, one
can improve the on−line help provided by the
shell.
The
helpfiles utility, found in the Util directory
of the distribution, is a Perl program that can be used to
process the zsh manual to produce a separate help file for
each shell builtin and for many other shell features as
well. The autoloadable run−help function, found
in Functions/Misc, searches for these helpfiles and
performs several other tests to produce the most complete
help possible for the command.
There may
already be a directory of help files on your system; look in
/usr/share/zsh or /usr/local/share/zsh and
subdirectories below those, or ask your system
administrator.
To create your
own help files with helpfiles, choose or create a
directory where the individual command help files will
reside. For example, you might choose ~/zsh_help. If
you unpacked the zsh distribution in your home directory,
you would use the commands:
mkdir
~/zsh_help
cd ~/zsh_help
man zshall | colcrt − | \
perl ~/zsh−4.0.7/Util/helpfiles
Next, to use
the run−help function, you need to add lines
something like the following to your .zshrc or
equivalent startup file:
unalias
run−help
autoload run−help
HELPDIR=~/zsh_help
The
HELPDIR parameter tells run−help where
to look for the help files. If your system already has a
help file directory installed, set HELPDIR to the
path of that directory instead.
Note that in
order for ’autoload run−help’ to
work, the run−help file must be in one of the
directories named in your fpath array (see
zshparam(1)). This should already be the case if you
have a standard zsh installation; if it is not, copy
Functions/Misc/run−help to an appropriate
directory.
Recompiling
Functions
If you frequently edit your zsh functions, or periodically
update your zsh installation to track the latest
developments, you may find that function digests compiled
with the zcompile builtin are frequently out of date
with respect to the function source files. This is not
usually a problem, because zsh always looks for the newest
file when loading a function, but it may cause slower shell
startup and function loading. Also, if a digest file is
explicitly used as an element of fpath, zsh
won’t check whether any of its source files has
changed.
The
zrecompile autoloadable function, found in
Functions/Misc, can be used to keep function digests
up to date.
zrecompile [ −qt ] [ name ... ]
zrecompile [ −qt ] −p
args [ −− args ... ]
This tries to find *.zwc
files and automatically re−compile them if at least
one of the original files is newer than the compiled file.
This works only if the names stored in the compiled files
are full paths or are relative to the directory that
contains the .zwc file.
In the first
form, each name is the name of a compiled file or a
directory containing *.zwc files that should be
checked. If no arguments are given, the directories and
*.zwc files in fpath are used.
When
−t is given, no compilation is performed, but a
return status of zero (true) is set if there are files that
need to be re−compiled and non−zero (false)
otherwise. The −q option quiets the chatty
output that describes what zrecompile is doing.
Without the
−t option, the return status is zero if all
files that needed re−compilation could be compiled and
non−zero if compilation for at least one of the files
failed.
If the
−p option is given, the args are
interpreted as one or more sets of arguments for
zcompile, separated by
’−−’. For example:
zrecompile
−p \
−R ~/.zshrc −− \
−M ~/.zcompdump −− \
~/zsh/comp.zwc ~/zsh/Completion/*/_*
This compiles
~/.zshrc into ~/.zshrc.zwc if that
doesn’t exist or if it is older than ~/.zshrc.
The compiled file will be marked for reading instead of
mapping. The same is done for ~/.zcompdump and
~/.zcompdump.zwc, but this compiled file is marked
for mapping. The last line re−creates the file
~/zsh/comp.zwc if any of the files matching the given
pattern is newer than it.
Without the
−p option, zrecompile does not create
function digests that do not already exist, nor does it add
new functions to the digest.
The following
shell loop is an example of a method for creating function
digests for all functions in your fpath, assuming
that you have write permission to the directories:
for ((i=1; i
<= $#fpath; ++i)); do
dir=$fpath[i]
zwc=${dir:t}.zwc
if [[ $dir == (.|..) || $dir == (.|..)/* ]]; then
continue
fi
files=($dir/*(N−.))
if [[ −w $dir:h && −n $files ]]; then
files=(${${(M)files%/*/*}#/})
if ( cd $dir:h &&
zrecompile −p −U −z $zwc $files ); then
fpath[i]=$fpath[i].zwc
fi
fi
done
The
−U and −z options are appropriate
for functions in the default zsh installation fpath;
you may need to use different options for your personal
function directories.
Once the
digests have been created and your fpath modified to
refer to them, you can keep them up to date by running
zrecompile with no arguments.
Keyboard
Definition
The large number of possible combinations of keyboards,
workstations, terminals, emulators, and window systems makes
it impossible for zsh to have built−in key bindings
for every situation. The zkbd utility, found in
Functions/Misc, can help you quickly create key bindings for
your configuration.
Run zkbd
either as an autoloaded function, or as a shell script:
zsh −f
~/zsh−4.0.7/Functions/Misc/zkbd
When you run
zkbd, it first asks you to enter your terminal type;
if the default it offers is correct, just press return. It
then asks you to press a number of different keys to
determine characteristics of your keyboard and terminal;
zkbd warns you if it finds anything out of the
ordinary, such as a Delete key that sends neither ^H
nor ^?.
The keystrokes
read by zkbd are recorded as a definition for an
associative array named key, written to a file in the
subdirectory .zkbd within either your HOME or
ZDOTDIR directory. The name of the file is composed
from the TERM, VENDOR and OSTYPE
parameters, joined by hyphens.
You may read
this file into your .zshrc or another startup file
with the "source" or "." commands, then
reference the key parameter in bindkey commands, like
this:
source
${ZDOTDIR:−$HOME}/.zkbd/$TERM−$VENDOR−$OSTYPE
[[ −n ${key[Left]} ]] && bindkey
"${key[Left]}" backward−char
[[ −n ${key[Right]} ]] && bindkey
"${key[Right]}" forward−char
# etc.
Note that in
order for ’autoload zkbd’ to work, the
zkdb file must be in one of the directories named in
your fpath array (see zshparam(1)). This
should already be the case if you have a standard zsh
installation; if it is not, copy Functions/Misc/zkbd
to an appropriate directory.
Dumping
Shell State
Occasionally you may encounter what appears to be a bug in
the shell, particularly if you are using a beta version of
zsh or a development release. Usually it is sufficient to
send a description of the problem to one of the zsh mailing
lists (see zsh(1)), but sometimes one of the zsh
developers will need to recreate your environment in order
to track the problem down.
The script
named reporter, found in the Util directory of
the distribution, is provided for this purpose. (It is also
possible to autoload reporter, but reporter is
not installed in fpath by default.) This script
outputs a detailed dump of the shell state, in the form of
another script that can be read with ’zsh
−f’ to recreate that state.
To use
reporter, read the script into your shell with the
’.’ command and redirect the output into
a file:
.
~/zsh−4.0.7/Util/reporter > zsh.report
You should
check the zsh.report file for any sensitive
information such as passwords and delete them by hand before
sending the script to the developers. Also, as the output
can be voluminous, it’s best to wait for the
developers to ask for this information before sending
it.
You can also
use reporter to dump only a subset of the shell
state. This is sometimes useful for creating startup files
for the first time. Most of the output from reporter is far
more detailed than usually is necessary for a startup file,
but the aliases, options, and zstyles
states may be useful because they include only changes from
the defaults. The bindings state may be useful if you
have created any of your own keymaps, because
reporter arranges to dump the keymap creation
commands as well as the bindings for every keymap.
As is usual
with automated tools, if you create a startup file with
reporter, you should edit the results to remove
unnecessary commands. Note that if you’re using the
new completion system, you should not dump the
functions state to your startup files with
reporter; use the compdump function instead
(see zshcompsys(1)).
reporter [ state ... ]
Print to standard output the
indicated subset of the current shell state. The
state arguments may be one or more of:
|
all |
|
Output everything listed below. |
|
aliases
Output alias definitions.
bindings
Output ZLE key maps and
bindings.
completion
Output old−style
compctl commands. New completion is covered by
functions and zstyles.
functions
Output autoloads and function
definitions.
|
limits |
|
Output limit commands. |
|
options
Output setopt
commands.
variables
Output shell parameter
assignments, plus export commands for any environment
variables.
zstyles
Output zstyle
commands.
If the
state is omitted, all is assumed.
With the
exception of ’all’, every state
can be abbreviated by any prefix, even a single letter; thus
a is the same as aliases, z is the same
as zstyles, etc.
PROMPT THEMES
Installation
You should make sure all the functions from the
Functions/Prompts directory of the source
distribution are available; they all begin with the string
’prompt_’ except for the special
function’promptinit’. You also need the
’colors’ function from
Functions/Misc. All of these functions may already
have been installed on your system; if not, you will need to
find them and copy them. The directory should appear as one
of the elements of the fpath array (this should
already be the case if they were installed), and at least
the function promptinit should be autoloaded; it will
autoload the rest. Finally, to initialize the use of the
system you need to call the promptinit function. The
following code in your .zshrc will arrange for this;
assume the functions are stored in the directory
~/myfns:
fpath=(~/myfns
$fpath)
autoload −U promptinit
promptinit
Theme
Selection
Use the prompt command to select your preferred
theme. This command may be added to your .zshrc
following the call to promptinit in order to start
zsh with a theme already selected.
prompt [ −c | −l ]
prompt [ −p | −h ] [
theme ... ]
prompt [ −s ] theme [ arg ...
]
Set or examine the prompt
theme. With no options and a theme argument, the
theme with that name is set as the current theme. The
available themes are determined at run time; use the
−l option to see a list. The special
theme ’random’ selects at random
one of the available themes and sets your prompt to
that.
In some cases
the theme may be modified by one or more arguments,
which should be given after the theme name. See the help for
each theme for descriptions of these arguments.
Options
are:
|
−c |
|
Show the currently selected theme and its parameters, if
any. |
|
−l |
|
List all available prompt themes. |
|
−p |
|
Preview the theme named by theme, or all themes
if no theme is given. |
|
−h |
|
Show help for the theme named by theme, or for
the prompt function if no theme is given. |
|
−s |
|
Set theme as the current theme and save
state. |
prompt_theme_setup
Each available theme has
a setup function which is called by the prompt
function to install that theme. This function may define
other functions as necessary to maintain the prompt,
including functions used to preview the prompt or provide
help for its use. You should not normally call a
theme’s setup function directly.
ZLE FUNCTIONS
Widgets
These functions all implement user−defined ZLE widgets
(see zshzle(1)) which can be bound to keystrokes in
interactive shells. To use them, your .zshrc should
contain lines of the form
autoload
function
zle −N function
followed by an
appropriate bindkey command to associate the function
with a key sequence. Suggested bindings are described below.
bash−forward−word,
bash−backward−word
bash−kill−word,
bash−backward−kill−word
bash−up−case−word,
bash−down−case−word
bash−transpose−words
These work similarly to the
corresponding builtin zle functions without the
’bash−’ prefix, but a word is
considered to consist of alphanumeric characters only. If
you wish to replace your existing bindings with these four
widgets, the following is sufficient:
for widget
in kill−word backward−kill−word \
forward−word backward−word \
up−case−word down−case−word \
transpose−words; do
autoload bash−$widget
zle −N $widget bash−$widget
done
cycle−completion−positions
After inserting an unambiguous
string into the command line, the new function based
completion system may know about multiple places in this
string where characters are missing or differ from at least
one of the possible matches. It will then place the cursor
on the position it considers to be the most interesting one,
i.e. the one where one can disambiguate between as many
matches as possible with as little typing as possible.
This widget
allows the cursor to be easily moved to the other
interesting spots. It can be invoked repeatedly to cycle
between all positions reported by the completion system.
edit−command−line
Edit the command line using
your visual editor, as in ksh.
bindkey
−M vicmd v edit−command−line
history−search−end
This function implements the
widgets
history−beginning−search−backward−end
and
history−beginning−search−forward−end.
These commands work by first calling the corresponding
builtin widget (see ’History Control’ in
zshzle(1)) and then moving the cursor to the end of
the line. The original cursor position is remembered and
restored before calling the builtin widget a second time, so
that the same search is repeated to look farther through the
history.
Although you
autoload only one function, the commands to use it
are slightly different because it implements two
widgets.
zle −N
history−beginning−search−backward−end
\
history−search−end
zle −N
history−beginning−search−forward−end
\
history−search−end
bindkey ’\e^P’
history−beginning−search−backward−end
bindkey ’\e^N’
history−beginning−search−forward−end
|
incarg |
|
Typing the keystrokes for this widget with the cursor
placed on or to the left of an integer causes that integer
to be incremented by one. With a numeric prefix argument,
the number is incremented by the amount of the argument
(decremented if the prefix argument is negative). The shell
parameter incarg may be set to change the default
increment something other than one. |
bindkey
’^X+’ incarg
incremental−complete−word
This allows incremental
completion of a word. After starting this command, a list of
completion choices can be shown after every character you
type, which you can delete with ^H or DEL.
Pressing return accepts the completion so far and returns
you to normal editing (that is, the command line is
not immediately executed). You can hit TAB to
do normal completion, ^G to abort back to the state
when you started, and ^D to list the matches.
This works only
with the new function based completion system.
bindkey
’^Xi’
incremental−complete−word
insert−files
This function allows you type a
file pattern, and see the results of the expansion at each
step. When you hit return, all expansions are inserted into
the command line.
bindkey
’^Xf’ insert−files
predict−on
This set of functions
implements predictive typing using history search. After
predict−on, typing characters causes the editor
to look backward in the history for the first line beginning
with what you have typed so far. After
predict−off, editing returns to normal for the
line found. In fact, you often don’t even need to use
predict−off, because if the line doesn’t
match something in the history, adding a key performs
standard completion, and then inserts itself if no
completions were found. However, editing in the middle of a
line is liable to confuse prediction; see the toggle
style below.
With the
function based completion system (which is needed for this),
you should be able to type TAB at almost any point to
advance the cursor to the next
’’interesting’’ character position
(usually the end of the current word, but sometimes
somewhere in the middle of the word). And of course as soon
as the entire line is what you want, you can accept with
return, without needing to move the cursor to the end
first.
The first time
predict−on is used, it creates several
additional widget functions:
delete−backward−and−predict
Replaces the
backward−delete−char widget. You do not
need to bind this yourself.
insert−and−predict
Implements predictive typing by
replacing the self−insert widget. You do not
need to bind this yourself.
predict−off
Turns off predictive
typing.
Although you
autoload only the predict−on function,
it is necessary to create a keybinding for
predict−off as well.
zle −N
predict−on
zle −N predict−off
bindkey ’^X^Z’ predict−on
bindkey ’^Z’ predict−off
smart−insert−last−word
This function may replace the
insert−last−word widget, like so:
zle −N
insert−last−word
smart−insert−last−word
With a numeric
prefix, it behaves like insert−last−word,
except that words in comments are ignored when
INTERACTIVE_COMMENTS is set.
Otherwise, the
rightmost ’’interesting’’ word from
the previous command is found and inserted. The default
definition of ’’interesting’’ is
that the word contains at least one alphabetic character,
slash, or backslash. This definition may be overridden by
use of the match style. The context used to look up
the style is the widget name, so usually the context is
:insert−last−word. However, you can bind
this function to different widgets to use different
patterns:
zle −N
insert−last−assignment
smart−insert−last−word
zstyle :insert−last−assignment match
’[[:alpha:]][][[:alnum:]]#=*’
bindkey ’\e=’
insert−last−assignment
Styles
The behavior of several of the above widgets can be
controlled by the use of the zstyle mechanism. In
particular, widgets that interact with the completion system
pass along their context to any completions that they
invoke.
break−keys
This style is used by the
incremental−complete−word widget. Its
value should be a pattern, and all keys matching this
pattern will cause the widget to stop incremental completion
without the key having any further effect. Like all styles
used directly by
incremental−complete−word, this style is
looked up using the context
’:incremental’.
completer
The
incremental−complete−word and
insert−and−predict widgets set up their
top−level context name before calling completion. This
allows one to define different sets of completer functions
for normal completion and for these widgets. For example, to
use completion, approximation and correction for normal
completion, completion and correction for incremental
completion and only completion for prediction one could
use:
zstyle
’:completion:*’ completer \
_complete _correct _approximate
zstyle ’:completion:incremental:*’ completer \
_complete _correct
zstyle ’:completion:predict:*’ completer \
_complete
It is a good
idea to restrict the completers used in prediction, because
they may be automatically invoked as you type. The
_list and _menu completers should never be
used with prediction. The _approximate,
_correct, _expand, and _match
completers may be used, but be aware that they may change
characters anywhere in the word behind the cursor, so you
need to watch carefully that the result is what you
intended.
|
cursor |
|
The insert−and−predict widget uses
this style, in the context ’:predict’, to
decide where to place the cursor after completion has been
tried. Values are: |
complete
The cursor is left where it was
when completion finished, but only if it is after a
character equal to the one just inserted by the user. If it
is after another character, this value is the same as
’key’.
|
key |
|
The cursor is left after the nth occurrence of
the character just inserted, where n is the number of
times that character appeared in the word before completion
was attempted. In short, this has the effect of leaving the
cursor after the character just typed even if the completion
code found out that no other characters need to be inserted
at that position. |
Any other value
for this style unconditionally leaves the cursor at the
position where the completion code left it.
|
list |
|
When using the
incremental−complete−word widget, this
style says if the matches should be listed on every key
press (if they fit on the screen). Use the context prefix
’:completion:incremental’. |
The
insert−and−predict widget uses this style
to decide if the completion should be shown even if there is
only one possible completion. This is done if the value of
this style is the string always. In this case the
context is ’:predict’ (not
’:completion:predict’).
|
match |
|
This style is used by
smart−insert−last−word to provide a
pattern (using full EXTENDED_GLOB syntax) that
matches an interesting word. The context is the name of the
widget to which
smart−insert−last−word is bound
(see above). The default behavior of
smart−insert−last−word is
equivalent to: |
zstyle
:insert−last−word match
’*[[:alpha:]/\\]*’
However, you
might want to include words that contain spaces:
zstyle
:insert−last−word match
’*[[:alpha:][:space:]/\\]*’
Or include
numbers as long as the word is at least two characters
long:
zstyle
:insert−last−word match
’*([[:digit:]]?|[[:alpha:]/\\])*’
The above
example causes redirections like "2>" to be
included.
|
prompt |
|
The
incremental−complete−word widget shows
the value of this style in the status line during
incremental completion. The string value may contain any of
the following substrings in the manner of the PS1 and
other prompt parameters: |
%c
|
|
|
Replaced by the name of the
completer function that generated the matches (without the
leading underscore). |
|
%l |
|
When the list style is set, replaced by
’...’ if the list of matches is too long
to fit on the screen and with an empty string otherwise. If
the list style is ’false’ or not set,
’%l’ is always removed. |
|
%n |
|
Replaced by the number of matches generated. |
|
%s |
|
Replaced by ’−no match−’,
’−no prefix−’, or an empty
string if there is no completion matching the word on the
line, if the matches have no common prefix different from
the word on the line, or if there is such a common prefix,
respectively. |
|
%u |
|
Replaced by the unambiguous part of all matches, if
there is any, and if it is different from the word on the
line. |
Like
’break−keys’, this uses the
’:incremental’ context.
stop−keys
This style is used by the
incremental−complete−word widget. Its
value is treated similarly to the one for the
break−keys style (and uses the same context:
’:incremental’). However, in this case
all keys matching the pattern given as its value will stop
incremental completion and will then execute their usual
function.
|
toggle |
|
This boolean style is used by predict−on
and its related widgets in the context
’:predict’. If set to one of the standard
’true’ values, predictive typing is
automatically toggled off in situations where it is unlikely
to be useful, such as when editing a multi−line buffer
or after moving into the middle of a line and then deleting
a character. The default is to leave prediction turned on
until an explicit call to predict−off. |
verbose
This boolean style is used by
predict−on and its related widgets in the
context ’:predict’. If set to one of the
standard ’true’ values, these widgets display a
message below the prompt when the predictive state is
toggled. This is most useful in combination with the
toggle style. The default does not display these
messages.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
There are a
large number of helpful functions in the
Functions/Misc directory of the zsh distribution.
Most are very simple and do not require documentation here,
but a few are worthy of special mention.
Descriptions
|
colors |
|
This function initializes several associative arrays to
map color names to (and from) the ANSI standard
eight−color terminal codes. These are used by the
prompt theme system (see above). You seldom should need to
run colors more than once. |
The eight base
colors are: black, red, green, yellow, blue, magenta, cyan,
and white. Each of these has codes for foreground and
background. In addition there are eight intensity
attributes: bold, faint, standout, underline, blink,
reverse, and conceal. Finally, there are six codes used to
negate attributes: none (reset all attributes to the
defaults), normal (neither bold nor faint),
no−standout, no−underline, no−blink, and
no−reverse.
Some terminals
do not support all combinations of colors and
intensities.
The associative
arrays are:
|
color |
|
|
|
colour |
|
Map all the color names to their integer codes, and
integer codes to the color names. The eight base names map
to the foreground color codes, as do names prefixed with
’fg−’, such as
’fg−red’. Names prefixed with
’bg−’, such as
’bg−blue’, refer to the background
codes. The reverse mapping from code to color yields base
name for foreground codes and the bg− form for
backgrounds. |
Although it is
a misnomer to call them ’colors’, these arrays
also map the other fourteen attributes from names to codes
and codes to names.
fg_bold
fg_no_bold
Map the eight basic color names
to ANSI terminal escape sequences that set the corresponding
foreground text properties. The fg sequences change
the color without changing the eight intensity
attributes.
bg_bold
bg_no_bold
Map the eight basic color names
to ANSI terminal escape sequences that set the corresponding
background properties. The bg sequences change the
color without changing the eight intensity attributes.
In addition,
the scalar parameters reset_color and
bold_color are set to the ANSI terminal escapes that
turn off all attributes and turn on bold intensity,
respectively.
fned name
Same as zed −f.
This function does not appear in the zsh distribution, but
can be created by linking zed to the name fned
in some directory in your fpath.
is−at−least
needed [ present ]
Perform a
greater−than−or−equal−to comparison
of two strings having the format of a zsh version number;
that is, a string of numbers and text with segments
separated by dots or dashes. If the present string is
not provided, $ZSH_VERSION is used. Segments are
paired left−to−right in the two strings with
leading non−number parts ignored. If one string has
fewer segments than the other, the missing segments are
considered zero.
This is useful
in startup files to set options and other state that are not
available in all versions of zsh.
is−at−least
3.1.6−15 && setopt NO_GLOBAL_RCS
is−at−least 3.1.0 && setopt
HIST_REDUCE_BLANKS
is−at−least 2.6−17 || print "You
can’t use is−at−least here."
nslookup [ arg
... ]
This wrapper function for the
nslookup command requires the zsh/zpty module
(see zshmodules(1)). It behaves exactly like the
standard nslookup except that it provides
customizable prompts (including a right−side prompt)
and completion of nslookup commands, host names, etc. (if
you use the function−based completion system).
Completion styles may be set with the context prefix
’:completion:nslookup’.
See also the
pager, prompt and rprompt styles
below.
run−help
See ’Accessing
On−Line Help’ above.
zed [ −f ]
name
This function uses the ZLE
editor to edit a file or function. It rebinds the return key
to insert a line break, and adds bindings for
’^X^W’ in the emacs keymap and
’ZZ’ in the vicmd keymap to accept
(and therefore write, in the case of a file) the edited file
or function. Keybindings are otherwise the standard ones;
completion is available, and styles may be set with the
context prefix ’:completion:zed’.
Only one
name argument is recognized (additional arguments are
ignored). If the −f option is given, the name
is taken to be that of a function; if the function is marked
for autoloading, zed searches for it in the
fpath and loads it. Note that functions edited this
way are installed into the current shell, but not
written back to the autoload file.
Without
−f, name is the path name of the file to
edit, which need not exist; it is created on write, if
necessary.
zcp [
−finqQvwW ] srcpat dest
zln [ −finqQsvwW ] srcpat dest
Same as zmv −C and
zmv −L, respectively. These functions do not
appear in the zsh distribution, but can be created by
linking zmv to the names zcp and zln in
some directory in your fpath.
|
zkbd |
|
See ’Keyboard Definition’ above. |
|
zmv [
−finqQsvwW ] [ −C | −L | −M |
−p program ] [ −o optstring ]
srcpat dest
Move (usually, rename) files
matching the pattern srcpat to corresponding files
having names of the form given by dest, where
srcpat contains parentheses surrounding patterns
which will be replaced in turn by $1, $2, ... in
dest. For example,
zmv
’(*).lis’ ’$1.txt’
renames
’foo.lis’ to
’foo.txt’,
’my.old.stuff.lis’ to
’my.old.stuff.txt’, and so on.
The pattern is
always treated as an EXTENDED_GLOB pattern. Any file
whose name is not changed by the substitution is simply
ignored. Any error (a substitution resulted in an empty
string, two substitutions gave the same result, the
destination was an existing regular file and −f
was not given) causes the entire function to abort without
doing anything.
Options:
|
−f |
|
Force overwriting of destination files. Not currently
passed down to the mv/cp/ln command due
to vagaries of implementations (but you can use
−o−f to do that). |
|
−i |
|
Interactive: show each line to be executed and ask the
user whether to execute it. ’Y’ or
’y’ will execute it, anything else will skip it.
Note that you just need to type one character. |
|
−n |
|
No execution: print what would happen, but don’t
do it. |
|
−q |
|
Turn bare glob qualifiers off: now assumed by default,
so this has no effect. |
|
−Q |
|
Force bare glob qualifiers on. Don’t turn this on
unless you are actually using glob qualifiers in a
pattern. |
|
−s |
|
Symbolic, passed down to ln; only works with
−L. |
|
−v |
|
Verbose: print each command as it’s being
executed. |
|
−w |
|
Pick out wildcard parts of the pattern, as described
above, and implicitly add parentheses for referring to
them. |
|
−W |
|
Just like −w, with the addition of turning
wildcards in the replacement pattern into sequential ${1} ..
${N} references. |
|
−C |
|
|
|
−L |
|
|
|
−M |
|
Force cp, ln or mv, respectively,
regardless of the name of the function. |
−p
program
Call program instead of
cp, ln or mv. Whatever it does, it
should at least understand the form ’program
−− oldname newname’ where
oldname and newname are filenames generated by
zmv.
−o
optstring
The optstring is split
into words and passed down verbatim to the cp,
ln or mv command called to perform the work.
It should probably begin with a
’−’.
For more
complete examples and other implementation details, see the
zmv source file, usually located in one of the
directories named in your fpath, or in
Functions/Misc/zmv in the zsh distribution.
zrecompile
See ’Recompiling
Functions’ above.
zstyle+ context style
value [ + subcontext style value ... ]
This makes defining styles a
bit simpler by using a single ’+’ as a
special token that allows you to append a context name to
the previously used context name. Like this:
zstyle+
’:foo:bar’ style1 value1 \
+ ’:baz’ style2 value2 \
+ ’:frob’ style3 value3
This defines
’style1’ with ’value1’ for the
context :foo:bar as usual, but it also defines
’style2’ with ’value2’ for the
context :foo:bar:baz and ’style3’ with
’value3’ for :foo:bar:frob. Any
subcontext may be the empty string to re−use
the first context unchanged.
Styles
insert−tab
The zed function
sets this style in context
’:completion:zed:*’ to turn off
completion when TAB is typed at the beginning of a
line. You may override this by setting your own value for
this context and style.
|
pager |
|
The nslookup function looks up this style in the
context ’:nslookup’ to determine the
program used to display output that does not fit on a single
screen. |
|
prompt |
|
|
rprompt
The nslookup function
looks up this style in the context
’:nslookup’ to set the prompt and the
right−side prompt, respectively. The usual expansions
for the PS1 and RPS1 parameters may be used
(see zshmisc(1)).
FILES
$ZDOTDIR/.zshenv
$ZDOTDIR/.zprofile
$ZDOTDIR/.zshrc
$ZDOTDIR/.zlogin
$ZDOTDIR/.zlogout
${TMPPREFIX}* (default is /tmp/zsh*)
/etc/zshenv
/etc/zprofile
/etc/zshrc
/etc/zlogin
/etc/zlogout (installation−specific −
/etc is the default)
SEE ALSO
sh(1),
csh(1), tcsh(1), rc(1), bash(1),
ksh(1)
IEEE
Standard for information Technology − Portable
Operating System Interface (POSIX) − Part 2: Shell and
Utilities, IEEE Inc, 1993, ISBN
1−55937−255−9.
|
zshall(1) |
|
|